Foreword

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law. Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, we will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to us.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! . NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. . ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you. ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification will not be covered under the NISSAN warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.

.

. .

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those above call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

WARNING
Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those above indicate movement or action.

BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. The Gracenote logo and logo type, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote. XM Radio® requires a subscription, sold separately after the first 90 days. It is not available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam. For more information, visit www.xmradio.com.

C * 2009 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number: For U.S. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: — Your name, address, and telephone number — Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver’s side) — Date of purchase — Current odometer reading — Your NISSAN dealer’s name — Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information on the left at: For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

SEATS
. The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION
.
SSS0133

WARNING
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this section. . After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/ or damages.

.

.

1-2

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT SEATS Front power seat adjustment
Operating tips: . The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.
SSS0928

.

Forward and backward:
1 Moving the switch * forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this section.) The seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

SSS0394

SPA1715

Front manual seat adjustment
Forward and backward:
1 Pull the lever up * while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

belt fit. See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this section. The seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped)
Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion to the desired position.

Reclining:
2 To recline the seatback, pull the lever up * and lean back. To bring the seatback forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

1-4

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the head restraints properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint. Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been removed. If the head restraint was removed, install and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

SSS0684

SSS1007

Lumbar support (if so equipped)
The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver.
1 Move the lever * up or down to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints. The head restraints are adjustable. Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.

Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of your ears.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

1-6

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0994

SSS0995

SSS0996

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

Removal
Use the following procedure to remove the adjustable head restraints. 1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position. 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 3. Remove the head restraint from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle. 5. Install and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position.

Install
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint is facing the correct direction. The stalk with 1 the adjustment notches * must be in2 stalled in the hole with the lock knob * . 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0508

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries. Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most. Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original position. Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described earlier in this section.

1-8

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper

.

SSS0136A

.

.

SSS0134A

.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

buckle. . Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the .

retractor. See a NISSAN dealer. Removal and installation of the pretensioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer. All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. . All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.
SSS0014

. . .

.

SSS0016

.

.

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child. There are three basic types of child restraint systems: . . . Rear-facing child restraint Front-facing child restraint Booster seat

properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.) Also, there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for additional protection.

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit. NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a threepoint type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

Infants
Infants up to at least one year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint. The passenger seat is not suitable for use with a rear facing child restraint for infants. Therefore, infants should not be transported in this vehicle.

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a front facing child restraint.

Small children
Children that are over one year old and weigh at least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor

WARNING
Children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop.

.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist, and place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. .

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

SSS0292

Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in this section.) 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. . The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it.

WARNING
. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. .

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during impacts. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, see “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.
SSS0290

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. The three-point type seat belts have two modes of operation: . . Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any question about seat belt operation, see a NISSAN dealer.

SSS0326

SSS0588

Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Shoulder belt arm
Before fastening the seat belt, pull the shoulder belt arm forward until it clicks at the lock position. Pulling the arm forward will allow an easy access to the belt.

Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: . . When the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available that is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows: . Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CHILD RESTRAINTS
dealer for assistance if the extender is required. . If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING
. Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with the NISSAN seat belts. Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop. .

.

SSS0099

.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
. To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.
SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

injury or death in an accident. . Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the seat by the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from .

WARNING
. Children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death. Children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. Improper use or improper installation of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. When your child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

.

.

.

CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder seat belt. Several manufacturers offer child restraints for children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

.

.

.

.

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

.

Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.

.

.

.

Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or that contacts the top tether strap may damage the top tether strap during a collision. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged.

SSS0929

Top tether anchor point location
The Anchor point is located on the floor of the cargo room.

The passenger seat is not suitable for use with a rear facing child restraint for infants. Therefore, infants should not be transported in this vehicle. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on front facing child restraints to be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to an anchor point.

Installing top tether strap
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt. Flip down the flap marked with a label as shown in the illustration. Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback and secure it to the tether anchor bracket that provides the straightest installation. Tighten the strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint, consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

WARNING
. Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

.

The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.
SSS0640
Front-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

.

SSS0100

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

The instructions in this section apply to child restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in the front passenger seat.

Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the front passenger seat: 1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a front-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in this vehicle. 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING
. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental front air bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental front air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The back of the child restraint should be secured against the seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section.) If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed.

SSS0360B
Front-facing — step 3 Front-facing — step 4

SSS0651

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

SSS0652
Front-facing — step 5 Front-facing — step 6

SSS0653
Front-facing — step 8

SSS0641

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. 7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT” earlier in this section.)

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, you may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

BOOSTER SEATS
9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the ALR mode. 10. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 8.

SSS0988
Front-facing — step 11

SSS0099

11. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, push the ignition switch to the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING
. Children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint or booster seat can result in serious injury or death. Children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also,

.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. . A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a three-point type seat belt with a booster seat can result in a serious injury in sudden stop or collision. Improper use or improper installation of a booster seat can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident. Do not use towels, books, pillows or other items in place of a booster seat. Items such as these may move during normal driving or a collision and result in serious injury or death. Booster seats are designed to be used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are designed to properly route the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt over the strongest portions of a child’s body to provide the maximum protection during a collision.

.

Follow all of the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a booster seat, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of booster seats in your vehicle. If the booster seat and seat belt is not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the booster seat, but as up- right as possible. After placing the child in the booster seat and fastening the seat belt, make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the abdomen. Do not put the shoulder belt behind the child or under the child’s arm. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, see “BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION” later in this section. When your booster seat is not in use, keep it secured with a seat belt

to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION
Remember that a booster seat left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the booster seat.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0455

SSS0363

LRS0454

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind: . Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

.

Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, if a 1 low back booster seat * is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a 2 high back booster seat * should be used.

.

.

If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the front passenger seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the front passenger seat:

SSS0640

LRS0454

1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, adjust the seatback so that it is upright and then move the seat to the rearmost position. Do not move the seat with the booster seat attached to it. 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section.) If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing. 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing. 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT” earlier in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver and passenger front impact supplemental air bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System), front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system, roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag and seat belt with pretensioners. Supplemental front-impact air bag system: The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvis area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The front seat sideimpact supplemental air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. These supplemental restraint systems are deSafety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

SSS0988

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, push the ignition switch to the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat used. (See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.)

signed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.) The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.
SSS0131B

SSS0132B

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
. The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it

inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far-away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. . The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. T he f r o n t pa s s e ng e r s e at i s equipped with an occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase the risk of injury if the supplemental front air bag inflates.

.

.

.

.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

SSS0007

SSS0008

SSS0099

SSS0006

SSS0009

SSS0100

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
. Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section for details.
SSS0059A SSS0159

.

.

WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bags: . The front seat-mounted side-impact air bags and roof-mounted curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds

SSS0162

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

of accidents. . The seat belts, side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.
SSS0680

NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM (front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag operation. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle switches and the occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based

on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the information provided by the occupant classification sensor. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). (See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section for further details.) One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system. If you have any questions about your air bag system, contact a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact a NISSAN dealer. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual. When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the head and chest of the front occupants. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the air bag module during inflation. The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. The supplemental front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

Status light: is The front passenger air bag status light located above the ashtray. The light operates as follows: . Unoccupied passenger seat: The is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. Passenger seat occupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions outlined in this section: The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational.

as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. The occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. The occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints. Failing to properly secure child restrains and to use the ALR mode (child

.

SSS0988
Front passenger air bag status light

.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Front passenger air bag: The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system. The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section for proper use and installation.) If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object being detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly. Using the passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly. If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the

child and the type of child restraint being used. If the passenger air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the passenger air bag status light is still not illuminated, try a different child restraint. If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly, do not transport a child in this vehicle. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status. However, if the seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status light will remain off. If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light , located in the meter and gauges area will blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions

WARNING
. Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bag inflates. Do not place objects with sharp edges on the seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave permanent impressions in the seat. Such objects can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor). This can affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury. Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious

.

.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

personal injury. . Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system. Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in .

.

.

serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that is not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the air bag system. . A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system. The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

.

.

.

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag and curtain air bag operation. When side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvis of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bags and curtain air bags may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag, and seated

as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the out-of-position occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air bags will deflate quickly after the collision is over. The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.

SSS0953

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-ofposition occupants. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side

WARNING
. Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

.

Right after inflation, several side air bags and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to side air bag and curtain air bag systems. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. Tampering with the air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatback or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bags. Work around and on the side air bag and curtain air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer. In-

.

stallation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the sideimpact air bag system. * The SRS wiring harnesses connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

necessary, replaced by a NISSAN dealer. . No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners. Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury. Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system. If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pretensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

.

.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS (front seats)
.

.

WARNING
. The pretensioners cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit. If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but a pretensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if

.

.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunction with the front air bag system. Working with

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants. The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts. When a pretensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, and it does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light will not come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition switch has been pushed to the ON position. In this case, the pretensioner system may not function properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the seat belt pretensioners and guide the buyer to the appropriate

sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SSS0930

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag and front seat-mounted sideimpact air bag are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
1 * SRS air bag

The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visors.
2 * SRS side-impact air bag

The warning label is located on the side of the passenger’s side center pillar.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing: . The supplemental air bag warning light remains on approximately 7 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

.
SPA1097

.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag, and seat belt pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits include the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), satellite sensors, crash zone sensor, occupant classification system, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain air bag modules, pretensioners and all related wiring. When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
. Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, if any of the front air bags inflate, the activated pretensioner must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner system should

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pretensioner system cannot be repaired. . The front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner system disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the 1 engine into the red zone * .

Odometer/twin trip odometer

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

1 2 The odometer * and twin trip odometer * are displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

Instruments and controls 2-5

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency” section for immediate action required.

SIC3975

SIC3976

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge points within the 1 zone * shown in the illustration. The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers “E” (Empty). The low fuel warning appears on the vehicle information display when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches “E”. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches “E”.

2-6

Instruments and controls

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

temperature is high may result in engine damage.

CAUTION
. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, light should turn off. If the the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” later in this section.
SIC4003
Triple meter

Voltmeter
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON 2 position, the volt meter * indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage. While cranking the engine, the volts drop below the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal range (11 to 15 volts) while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

3 If necessary, adjust the clock * on the setting screen of the vehicle information display. (See “CLOCK” later in this section.)

If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

When the engine oil temperature is high, the engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Driving while the engine oil
Instruments and controls 2-7

CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and push the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on (if so equipped): , or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go off (if so equipped): , or , , , , ,

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display. (See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” later in this section.)

If any light does not come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

2-8

Instruments and controls

WARNING LIGHTS or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

or

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator: When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning light: When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. (See “BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.) 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator: When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” earlier in this section.)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

WARNING
. Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. If the brake fluid level is below the minimum or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer.

.

Automatic transmission check warning light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any other time, it may indicate the transmission is not functioning properly. Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the transmission.

.

Instruments and controls 2-9

Charge warning light
If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately.

pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

functioning properly. After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off. Low tire pressure warning: If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. For additional information, see “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emergency” section. TPMS malfunction: If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is pushed ON. The light will remain on after the 1

Intelligent Key system warning light
After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off. This light warns of a malfunction with the electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent Key system. If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to free the steering lock or to start the engine. If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Engine oil pressure warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.)

Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare. The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil

2-10 Instruments and controls

minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after the 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

correctly. . Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display: . . . . . No key warning Low fuel warning Low washer fluid warning Parking brake release warning Door/rear hatch open warning

WARNING
. If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch pushed ON, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low

.

.

See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” later in this section.

CAUTION
. The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly. If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate

Seat belt warning light and chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, and will remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.
Instruments and controls 2-11

.

The seat belt warning light for the front passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger. See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section for precautions on seat belt usage.

not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioner seat belt may not function properly. For additional information, see “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.

Cruise indicator light
Cruise main switch indicator: This light illuminates when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light turns off when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light illuminates, the cruise control system is operational. (See “CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) Cruise malfunction: If the cruise indicator light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See “CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag systems and/or pretensioner system will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Supplemental air bag warning light
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate. The air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag systems and/or pretensioner system are operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag systems and/or pretensioner system need servicing, and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest NISSAN dealer. . . . The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. The supplemental air bag warning light does

INDICATOR LIGHTS Transmission position indicator (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the indicator shows the transmission position. (See “DRIVING THE VEHICLE” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Front passenger air bag status light
The front passenger air bag status light ( ), located on the center of the instrument panel, will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used. For front passenger air bag status light operation, see “NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM (front seats)” in the “1. Safety —

only)” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.) Operation: The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways: . Malfunction indicator light on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. Malfunction indicator light blinking — An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. c) Avoid steep uphill grades. d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and remain on. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

High beam indicator light (blue)
This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
If the malfunction indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. The malfunction indicator light may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/ maintenance test. (See “READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US

Security indicator light
The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational. If the security system is malfunctioning, this light
Instruments and controls 2-13

will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position. For additional information, see “SECURITY SYSTEMS” later in this section.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light
The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates that the vehicle dynamic control system and traction control system are not operating. When the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light and slip indicator light come on with the vehicle dynamic control system turned on, this light alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle dynamic control system’s fail-safe mode is operating, for example the vehicle dynamic control system may not be functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the vehicle dynamic control system function will be canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual.

vehicle.

Light reminder chime
A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the light switch in the or position and the ignition switch in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. Turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle.

Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

Parking brake reminder chime
A chime will sound if the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake.

Small light indicator light
The light illuminates when the headlight switch is turned to the position.

Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of the brake pad the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Key reminder chime
A chime will sound if the driver side door is opened while the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC position or pushed to the OFF or LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position, and take the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION 1. Engine start operation indicator
This indicator appears when the selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This indicator means that the engine will start by

pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed.

2. Steering lock release malfunction indicator
This indicator appears when the steering wheel cannot be released from the LOCK position.
Instruments and controls 2-15

If this indicator appears, push the push-button ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.

Unregistered key: The warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed from the LOCK position and the key cannot be recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key. Use the registered key. See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for more details.

To push the ignition switch to the OFF position, perform the following procedure: SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the selector lever to “P”) ? PUSH warning ? (Push the ignition switch ? ignition switch position is turned to ON) ? PUSH warning ? (Push the ignition switch ? ignition switch position is turned to OFF)

3. Key insertion indicator
This indicator appears when the key needs to be inserted into the key port. If this indicator appears, insert the key into the key port in the correct direction. (See “PUSHBUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

8. Key battery discharge indicator
This indicator appears when the key battery is running out of power. If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

6. SHIFT “P” warning
This warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the selector lever in any position except the P (Park) position. If this warning appears, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position or push the ignition switch to the ON position. An inside warning chime will also sound. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Predriving checks and adjustments” section.)

4. Key removal indicator
This indicator appears when the driver’s door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and the key placed in the key port. A key reminder chime also sounds. If this indicator appears, remove the key from the key port and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

9. Engine start operation indicator (Manual Transmission models)
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the clutch pedal depressed.

5. NO KEY warning
This warning appears in either of the following conditions. No key inside the vehicle: The warning appears when the door is closed with the key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Make sure that the key is inside the vehicle.

7. “PUSH” warning
This warning appears when the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P” warning appears.

2-16 Instruments and controls

There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty (E) position.

4. Door/rear hatch open warning (ignition switch is in the ON position)
This warning appears if any of the doors and/or the rear hatch are open or not closed securely. The vehicle icon indicates which door is open on the display.

5. “Time to rest” indicator
This indicator appears when the set “time to rest” indicator activates. You can set the time for up to 6 hours. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)
SIC4027

6. Low outside temperature warning
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 378F (38C). The warning can be set not to be displayed. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

occurs. When the warning appears, the SMODE function will not operate, but the manual transmission will operate normally and driving can be continued. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Oil filter replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing the oil filter. You can set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

3. Tire replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

4. “OTHER” indicator
This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing the items. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.) More maintenance reminders are also available on the center display. (See “HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.)

SIC4031

INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE 1. Engine oil replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the set time comes for changing the engine oil. You can set or reset the distance for changing the engine oil. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

TRIP COMPUTER
Switches for the trip computer are located on the left side of the combination meter panel. To operate the trip computer, push the switches as shown above.
A * B *

Current fuel consumption (MPG or l (liter)/100 km)
The current fuel consumption mode shows the current fuel consumption.

ENTER switch

A Each time the switch * is pushed, the display will change as follows:

NEXT switch When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, modes of the trip computer can be A selected by pushing the switch * .

Instruments and controls 2-19

Speed: The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is B done by pushing the switch * for longer than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is also reset at the same time.) The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows “——”.

SIC3674

SIC3675

Average fuel consumption (MPG or l (liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH or km/h)
Fuel consumption: The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. B Resetting is done by pushing the switch * for longer than 1 second. (The average speed is also reset at the same time.) The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the display shows “——”.

Elapsed time and trip odometer (MILES or km)
Elapsed time: The elapsed time mode shows the time since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset B by pushing the switch * for longer than 1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the same time.) Trip odometer: The trip odometer mode shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the B switch * for longer than 1 second. (The elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)

2-20 Instruments and controls

pushed to the OFF position may continue to be displayed. . When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

SIC3676

SIC4037

Distance to empty (MILES or km)
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The dte mode includes a low range warning feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is displayed on the screen. When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte display will change to “——”. . If the amount of fuel added is small, the display just before the ignition switch is

Outside air temperature (8F or 8C)
The outside air temperature is displayed in 8F or 8C in the range of −22 to 1318F (−30 to 558C). The outside air temperature mode includes a low temperature warning feature. If the outside air temperature is below 378F (38C), the warning “ICY” is displayed on the screen. The outside temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind directions and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual outside temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or billboards.
Instruments and controls 2-21

ALERT: Alert menu can be set to notify the following items. . UPSHIFT Select this submenu to set the engine speed (RPM) of the upshift indicator. (See “Upshift indicator (if so equipped for Manual Transmission models)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) .
SIC3992

to the nearest previous or next hour. MAINTENANCE: The maintenance intervals of the following items can be set or reset for the reminders. . ENGINE OIL Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for changing the engine oil. . OIL FILTER Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter. . TIRE Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for replacing tires. . OTHER Select this submenu and set or reset the distance for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. To return to the top page of the setting mode, select “BACK”. OPTIONS: The 3 option menus can be set to your preference.

TIMER Select this submenu to specify when the “TIME TO REST” indicator activates.

Setting
Setting cannot be made while driving. A message “Setting can only be operated when stopped” is also displayed on the vehicle information display.
A B The switch * and switch * are used in the setting mode to select and decide a menu.

To return to the top page of the setting mode, select “BACK”. CLOCK: Clock adjustment can be set on this menu. . SETTING Adjust the time (hour and minute) of the clock on the triple meter. . RESET Select this submenu to set the time quickly

SKIP: Push the switch warning check mode. Push the
A *

to move to the

B switch * to select other menus.

2-22 Instruments and controls

.

LANGUAGE Select this submenu to choose English or French for display.

SKIP: Push the switch warning check mode. Push the DETAIL: This item is available only when a warning is displayed. Select this menu to see the details of warnings.
A *

to move to the

.

UNIT Select this submenu to choose the unit from MPG or l/100 km.

B switch * to select other menus.

.

EFFECTS Select this menu to set the dial effects described below to on or off. — The indicator needles sweep in the meters when the engine is started.

SIC3993

To return to the top page of the setting mode, select “BACK”.

Warning check
To see if there are any of the following warnings and corresponding details, select this menu. . . . . . No key warning Low fuel warning Low washer fluid warning Parking brake release warning Door/rear hatch open warning

Instruments and controls 2-23

SECURITY SYSTEMS
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in the vehicle, and always lock it when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

SIC2132

SIC2045

Your vehicle has two types of security systems, as follows: . . Vehicle security system NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows. The system can be armed even if the windows are open. 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. 3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle. 4. Close all doors, hood and rear hatch. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key, door handle request switch, power door lock switch or mechanical key. 5. Confirm that the security indicator light comes on. The security indicator light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle

The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors, hood or rear hatch when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

2-24 Instruments and controls

security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase. The security light begins to flash once every approximately 3 seconds. If, during this 30-second pre-arm time period, the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is pushed to ACC or ON, the system will not arm. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood and rear hatch locked with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. When pushing the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, the system will be released.

Intelligent Key, the door handle request switch or the mechanical key. (Even if the door is opened by releasing the door inside lock knob, the alarm will activate.) . Opening the hood.

two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent Key, the door handle request switch or using the mechanical key. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position. If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following alarm: . . The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 1 minute. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered Intelligent Key. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT ASSY - CARD SLOT) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following
Instruments and controls 2-25

The alarm is activated by: . Unlocking the door or opening the rear hatch without using the button on the

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
service as soon as possible. Please bring all Intelligent Keys that you have when visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION
.
SIC2045

Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty. Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.

Security indicator light
The security indicator light is located on the meter panel. It indicates the status of the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. The light blinks after the ignition switch was in the LOCK position. This function indicates the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational. If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

. .

2-26 Instruments and controls

.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

the factory default setting. To turn this function on and off, see “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.
2 * 3 *

Low — continuous low speed operation

High — continuous high speed operation 4 Push the lever up * to have one sweep operation of the wiper.
5 Pull the lever toward you * to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times.

SIC3787

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:
1 *

Intermittent — intermittent operation can be A adjusted by turning the knob toward * B (Slower) or * (Faster). When the speed sensing wiper interval function (for models with navigation system) is turned on, the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.) Note that the function is set to disabled as
Instruments and controls 2-27

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE . When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional headlights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly.

SIC3979
Type A Type B

SIC3980

.

To defog/defrost the rear window glass, start the 1 engine and push the switch * on. The 2 indicator light * will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize. . The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to turn

2-28 Instruments and controls

off the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on. This way the life of the xenon headlights is not reduced. . If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer.

SIC3994

SIC3995

HEADLIGHT SWITCH Lighting
1 *

Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. To set the autolight system: 1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the 1 AUTO position * . 2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, or position. The autolight system can turn on the headlights
Instruments and controls 2-29

*
2

Turn the switch to the position: The front park, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on. Turn the switch to the position: Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

automatically when it is dark and turn off the headlights when it is light. If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the headlights remain on for 5 minutes. Automatic headlights off delay: You can keep the headlights on for up to 180 seconds after you push the ignition switch to OFF and open any door then close all the doors. You can adjust the period of the automatic headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to 180 seconds. The factory default setting is 45 seconds. For automatic headlights off delay setting, see “Auto Headlights Off Delay” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.

SIC3784A

SIC3996

Be sure not to put anything on top of the A photo sensor * located on the top of the instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate.

Headlight beam select
1 * 2 *

To select the low beam, put the lever in the neutral position as shown. To select the high beam, push the lever forward while the switch is in the position. Pull it back to select the low beam. Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam even when the headlight switch is in the OFF position.

3 *

Battery saver system
A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the light switch in the or position and the ignition switch in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

2-30 Instruments and controls

When the headlight switch is in the or position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the lights will automatically turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF position. When the headlight switch remains in the or position after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

CAUTION
. When you turn on the headlight switch again after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will not turn off automatically. Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will be discharged. Never leave the light switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn off automatically.

WARNING
It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
SIC3981

Instrument brightness control
The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the , or AUTO position (with the autolights activated).
A B Push the upper * or lower * switch to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights when driving at night.

.

Daytime running light system (Canada only)
The daytime running lights automatically illuminate when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights
Instruments and controls 2-31

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

SIC3997

SIC3998

SIC2574

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
1 * Turn signal

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the rear fog light on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the switch to the position. To turn it off, turn the switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on for the fog light to operate.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash.

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
2 * Lane change signal

WARNING
. If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing.

.

2-32 Instruments and controls

HORN
. Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

CAUTION
. The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-33

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch in any position. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving. .

.

SIC3982

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

.

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. .

.

.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH
indicator light turns off. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the switch.

SIC2770

SIC4004

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select the desired heat range. . . . For high heat, push the HI side of the 1 switch * . For low heat, push the LO side of the 2 switch * .
3 The indicator light * will illuminate when the heater is on.

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving conditions. If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator will illuminate. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to the level position. Make sure that the

2-34 Instruments and controls

POWER OUTLET
The power outlet is located in the center console and on the lower glove box. contact the outlet.

CAUTION
. . The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. Use power outlet with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. Avoid using power outlet when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on. This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow. Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to
Instruments and controls 2-35

.
SIC3984
Center console

.

. .

.

SIC3985
Lower glove box

.

STORAGE CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION
. Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
SIC3986

.

SIC3987

INSTRUMENT POCKET (except for navigation system equipped models)
To open the lid, push the knob up To close, push the lid down.
1 *.

Two cup holders are attached to the center console. To use the cup holder located in the center 1 console box, push the button * and open the lid.

WARNING
Keep the pocket lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-36 Instruments and controls

SIC3988

SIC3999

SIC4000

Soft bottle holder

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLE BOX

CAUTION
. Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident. Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop. To open the glove box, pull the handle

1 To open the console box, push the button * and pull up the lid. To store large items, the 2 partition * can be removed and stored as 3 illustrated. The inner tray * can also be removed for larger items.

To close, push the lid down until latched.

.

*.
1

To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.
2 3 To lock * /unlock * the glove box, use the mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage, see “KEYS” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Instruments and controls 2-37

WARNING
Keep the rear parcel box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

SIC3989

REAR PARCEL BOX
The rear parcel box is located behind the rightside seat. To open the rear parcel box, pull the upper part 1 2 of the lid to position * or * . To remove the rear parcel box, pull the lid to 3 position * with a greater force until it unlatches. And then, pull the rear parcel box to 4 direction * . To install, make sure the two hinges of the rear parcel box engaged with the holders, then perform the steps above in the reverse order.
SIC4026

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
The cargo cover keeps the contents in the cargo area hidden from the outside. To use the cargo cover, pull it out and hang both 1 sides on the hooks * located on the inside of the rear hatch.

2-38 Instruments and controls

WINDOWS
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. . Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged. — If the cargo cover contacts the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor, remove the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its attachment location. If the cargo cover is not removed, it may damage the top tether strap during a collision. — Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or that contacts the top tether strap may damage the top tether strap during a collision.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING
. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in the window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

.

SIC3990

To remove the cargo cover unit, stow the cover 2 and pull the holder * to the opposite side.

WARNING
. Never put anything on the cargo cover, no matter how small. Any object on it could cause an injury in an accident or sudden stop. Do not leave the cargo cover in the vehicle with it disengaged from the holder. Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place

.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

Passenger side power window switch
The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it.

Automatic operation
To fully open or close the window, completely push down or pull up the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the window, just push or lift the switch in the opposite direction. A light push or pull on the switch will cause the window to open or close until the switch is released.

A To open or close the window, push down * or B pull up * the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

Locking passengers’ window

C When the lock button * is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

2-40 Instruments and controls

Auto reverse function

Automatic adjusting function

If the windows do not close automatically
If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system. 1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Close the door. 3. Open the window completely by operating the power window switch. 4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed completely. 5. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete. 6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other windows. If the power window automatic function does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window. If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered. The auto reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

CAUTION
When the battery cable is removed from the battery terminal, do not close either of the front doors. The automatic window adjusting function will not work and the side roof panel may be damaged. The power window has an automatic adjusting function. When the door is being opened, the window is automatically lowered slightly to avoid contact between the window and the side roof panel. When the door is closed, the window is automatically raised slightly. While the automatic adjusting function does not work, the window will be controlled as follows: . . When the door is opened, the window lowers for approximately 2 seconds. While the door is open, the window cannot be raised.

Instruments and controls 2-41

INTERIOR LIGHTS
. doors are unlocked by pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key or door handle request switch with the ignition switch in the LOCK position — remain on for about 15 seconds. . any door is opened and then closed with the ignition switch in the LOCK position — remain on for about 15 seconds. . any door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position — remain on while the door is opened. When the door is closed, the lights go off. The lights will also turn off after 30 minutes when the lights remain illuminated after the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF or LOCK position to prevent the battery from becoming discharged. When the auto interior illumination is set to the OFF position (see “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS (models with navigation system)” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section), the lights will illuminate under the following condition: . any door is opened with the ignition switch in any position

SIC4001

SIC4002

MAP LIGHTS
Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on or off.

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
The interior light control switch has three positions: ON, DOOR and OFF.

ON position
When the switch is in the ON position map lights will illuminate.

1 *

the

DOOR position

2 When the switch is in the DOOR position * , the map lights will illuminate under the following conditions:

.

ignition switch is switched to the OFF or LOCK position — remain on for about 15 seconds.

2-42 Instruments and controls

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
— remain on while the door is opened. When the door is closed, the lights go off.

CARGO ROOM LIGHT
The light illuminates when the rear hatch is opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light will turn off. The light will also turn off after 30 minutes when the light remains illuminated after the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF or LOCK position to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

OFF position

3 When the switch is in the OFF position * , the lights will not illuminate, regardless of the condition.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
SIC3869

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened. When the cover is closed, the light will turn off. The lights will also turn off after 30 minutes when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

Instruments and controls 2-43

HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: . Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.
®

.

reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. . During programming procedure, your garage door or security gate may open or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming. Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.

1996) have “rolling code protection”. To program a garage door opener equipped with “rolling code protection”; you will need to use a ladder to get up to the garage door opener motor to be able to access the “smart or learn” program button.

Once HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, see “PROGRAMMING HomeLink®” later in this section.

.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink®
To program your HomeLink® Transceiver to operate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener, home or office lighting, you need to be at the same location as the device. Note: Garage door openers (manufactured after

WARNING
. Do not use HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and

2-44 Instruments and controls

activate. 5. If the indicator light on HomeLink® blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink® has picked up a “rolling code” garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train HomeLink®, completing the programming may require a ladder and another person for convenience. 6. Push and release the program button located on the garage door opener’s motor to activate the “training mode”. This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the training button. NOTE: Once you have pushed and released the training button on the garage door opener’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. For convenience, use the help of a second person to assist when performing this step. 7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing and releasing the garage door opener training button) and firmly push and release the HomeLink ® button you have just programmed. Push and release the HomeLink®
Instruments and controls 2-45

SIC3612

SIC3613

1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer HomeLink® buttons (to clear the memory) until the A indicator light * blinks (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches away from the HomeLink® surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. 4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on HomeLink® flashes, changing from a “slow blink” to a “rapid blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light blinks rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other programmed device, push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button - releasing when the device begins to

button up to three times to complete the training. 8. Your HomeLink® button should now be programmed. To program the remaining HomeLink® buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow steps 2 through 8 only. NOTE: Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to “clear” all previously programmed HomeLink® buttons. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, please refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www. homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.

OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply push the appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION
Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to clear all programming, push and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (in approximately 20 seconds).

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS
If HomeLink® does not quickly learn the handheld transmitter information: . . replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® surface. push and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption. position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following. 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink ® button. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. 3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter

.

.

2-46 Instruments and controls

button. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.
®

may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that
Instruments and controls 2-47

KEYS
A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record any key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by a NISSAN dealer. nents when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer. It is possible that the Intelligent Key functions become canceled. Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a precision device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid damaging it, please note the following. — The Intelligent Key is water resistant; however, wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry. — Do not bend, drop or strike it against another object. — Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 1408F (608C). — Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. — Do not use a magnet key holder. — Do not place the Intelligent Key

INTELLIGENT KEY
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-

3-2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

.

near an electric appliance such as a television set or personal computer. — Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come into contact with water or salt water, and do not wash it in a washing machine. This could affect the system function. If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Key.

VALET HAND-OFF
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings. To prevent the glove box from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedures below. 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key. 3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, keeping the mechanical key in your pocket or bag for insertion into the Intelligent Key when you retrieve your vehicle. See “STORAGE” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

SPA2033

Mechanical key
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors, and glove box. See “DOORS” later in this section and “STORAGE” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS
the key is turned once. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.)

WARNING
. Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
SPA2565

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY
The driver’s door key operation also allows you to open and close the window that is equipped with the automatic open/close function. (See “POWER WINDOWS” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.) To open the window, turn the driver’s door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second. The door is unlocked and the window keeps opening while turning the key. This function can also be performed by pushing and holding the door UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key. (See “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM” later in this section.) To close the window, turn the driver’s door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second. The door is locked and the window keeps closing while turning the key.

. .

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously using the mechanical key. . . Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the 1 front of the vehicle * will lock all doors. Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once 2 to the rear of the vehicle * will unlock the driver’s door. After returning the key to the 3 neutral position * , turning it to the rear again within 60 seconds will unlock all doors. You can switch the lock system to the mode that allows you to open all the doors when

.

3-4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

push the power door lock switch to the unlock 2 position * .

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver or front passenger) is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any door open, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed. These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

SPA2566

SPA2300

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door individually, move the inside 1 lock knob to the lock position * then close the door. To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the 2 unlock position * . When locking the door without an Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Operating the power door lock switch will lock or unlock all the doors. The switches are located on the driver’s and front passenger’s door armrests. To lock the doors, push the power door lock 1 switch to the lock position * with the driver’s or front passenger’s door open, then close the door. When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle. To unlock the doors including the fuel-filler door,

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
. All doors will be locked automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h). All the doors will unlock automatically when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

.

The automatic lock and unlock functions can be deactivated or activated independently of each other. To deactivate or activate the automatic door lock or unlock system, perform the following procedure: 1. Close all doors. 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
3. Do one of the following within 20 seconds of performing step 2: . To change AUTO UNLOCK settings: push and hold the power door lock switch to the UNLOCK position for more than 5 seconds. To change AUTO LOCK settings: push and hold the power door lock switch to the LOCK position for more than 5 seconds. .

WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises that the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored during a flight. .

CAUTION
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle. Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

.

.

.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard indicator will flash once. 5. The ignition must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions. . When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station. When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, and CB radio. When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials. When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby. When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door and rear hatch locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation. Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system.

.

. . .

3-6

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

computer. . When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

.

CAUTION
. Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. Do not drop the Intelligent Key. Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object. Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry. Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 1408F (608C). Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one. Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter. For information regarding replacement of a battery, see “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. Because the steering wheel is locked electrically, unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent

Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

. . . .

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

.

.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) 1 from each request switch * . If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors including the rear hatch.

SPA2568

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION
. Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle. After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the key with you and then lock the doors.

SPA2567

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified 1 operating range from the request switch * . When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

.

.

3-8

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

.

Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door. The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing doors with the door handle request switch) can be set to remain inactive. (See “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS (models with navigation system)” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.)
SPA2569 SPA2570

.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out from your pocket or bag.

SPA2571

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors and the rear hatch by pushing the door handle request switch A (driver’s or front passenger’s) * or the rear B hatch request switch * within the range of operation. When you lock or unlock the doors and the rear hatch, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode” later in this section.

*2: Doors and the rear hatch will not lock with the Intelligent Key while any door or the rear hatch is open. *3: Doors and the rear hatch will not lock by pushing the door handle request switch or the rear hatch request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors and the rear hatch can be locked with another registered Intelligent Key.

following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch while the doors are locked. . . . Opening any door Pushing the ignition switch Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent Key port.

Locking doors, rear hatch and fuel-filler door
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1 2. Close all the doors and the rear hatch.*2 3. Push the door handle request switch (driver’s or front passenger’s) or the rear hatch request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.*3 4. All the doors, rear hatch and fuel-filler door will lock. 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the outside chime sounds twice. *1: Doors and the rear hatch will lock with the Intelligent Key while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Unlocking doors, rear hatch and fuel-filler door
1. Push the door handle request switch (driver’s or front passenger’s) or the rear hatch request switch once while carrying the Intelligent Key with you. 2. The hazard indicator flashes once and outside chime sounds once. The corresponding door and the fuel-filler door or the rear hatch will unlock. 3. Push the door handle request switch or the rear hatch request switch again within 60 seconds. 4. The hazard indicator flashes once and outside chime sounds once again. All the doors and the rear hatch will unlock. All doors, the rear hatch and the fuel-filler door will be locked automatically unless one of the

During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will be locked automatically after another 1 minute.

Opening rear hatch
To open only the rear hatch, perform the following procedure. 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. 2. Push the rear hatch opener switch 3. The rear hatch will unlock.
C *.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
When all the following conditions are met for 60 minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply to prevent battery discharge. . . The ignition switch is in the ACC position, and All doors are closed, and

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

.

The selector lever is in the P (Park) position (Automatic Transmission models).

WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and a warning displays in the vehicle information display. When a chime or beep sounds or the warning displays, be sure to check the vehicle and Intelligent Key. See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in this section and “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom The SHIFT P warning appears on the display When pushing the ignition switch and the inside warning chime sounds conto stop the engine tinuously (Automatic Transmission models). When opening the driver’s door to get out of the vehicle Possible cause Action to take

The selector lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) position. position. The ignition switch is in the ACC position. The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key port. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. Close the door securely. Push the door handle request switch after the door is closed.

The inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The NO KEY warning appears on the display, The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately position. When closing the door after get- 3 seconds. ting out of the vehicle The SHIFT P warning appears on the display The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the selector lever is not in and the outside chime sounds continuously the P (Park) position. (Automatic Transmission models). When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle inside lock knob turned to LOCK seconds and all the doors unlock. and cargo room area. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle and cargo room area. When pushing the door handle request switch to lock the door The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 A door is not closed securely. seconds. The door handle request switch is pushed before the door is closed.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
The lock and unlock buttons on the Intelligent Key will not operate when: . . the distance between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m). the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

WARNING
The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises that the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored during a flight. It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel-filler door, activate the panic alarm and open the windows by pushing the buttons on the Intelligent Key from outside the vehicle. Before locking the doors, make sure the Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle. The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

After locking with the remote keyless entry function, pull the door handle to make sure the doors are securely locked. The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies depending on the environment. To securely operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.
SPA2252B

1. 2. 3.

LOCK button UNLOCK button PANIC button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
When you lock or unlock the doors and rear hatch, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode” later in this section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Locking doors, rear hatch and fuel-filler door
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1 2. Close all the doors and the rear hatch.*2 3. Push the LOCK Intelligent Key. button
1 *

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again. All the doors and the rear hatch will unlock. All doors and the rear hatch will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key while the doors are locked. If during this 1minute time period, the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors and the rear hatch will be locked automatically after another 1 minute. . . . Opening any door Pushing the ignition switch Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent Key port

Key. The door window can be opened or closed by turning the metal key in a door lock. (See “DOORS” earlier in this section.)

Using panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows:
3 1. Push the PANIC button * on the Key for more than 1 second.

on the

4. All the doors, the rear hatch and fuel-filler door will lock. 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. *1: Doors and the rear hatch will lock with the Intelligent Key while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. *2: Doors and the rear hatch will not lock with the Intelligent Key while any door or the rear hatch is open.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds. 3. The panic alarm stops when: . . It has run for 25 seconds, or Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key are pushed. (Note: Panic button should be pushed for more than 1 second.)

Opening windows
The UNLOCK button operation also allows you to open a window that is equipped with the automatic open/close function. (See “POWER WINDOWS” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.) To open the window, push the door UNLOCK 2 button * on the Intelligent Key for about 3 seconds after the door is unlocked. To stop opening, release the UNLOCK button. Window cannot be closed using the Intelligent

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn mode when you first receive the vehicle. In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the 1 LOCK button * is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. 2 When the UNLOCK button * is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once.

on the

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The driver’s door and fuel-filler door will unlock. 3. Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key again within 60 seconds.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

If horns are not necessary, the system can be switched to the hazard indicator mode. In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates.

HOOD
Switching procedure: To switch the hazard indicator and horn (chime) 1 operation, push the LOCK * and UN2 LOCK * buttons on the Intelligent Key simultaneously for more than 2 seconds. . . When the hazard indicator mode is set, the hazard indicator flashes 3 times. When the hazard indicator and horn mode is set, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once.

SPA2572
1 1. Pull the hood lock release handle * located below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly. 2 2. Pull the lever * up at the front of the hood with your fingertips and raise the hood. 3 3. Hold the insulator * of the support rod 4 and insert its end into the slot * on the front edge of the hood.

WARNING
. Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

.

4. When closing the hood, store the support rod to its original position, then slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REAR HATCH

WARNING
Do not drive with the rear hatch open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual.

SPA2573

REAR HATCH OPENER SWITCH
The rear hatch can be opened by pushing the rear hatch opener switch when the Intelligent Key is within the operating range of the rear hatch lock/unlock function regardless of the inside lock knob position. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” earlier in this section.) To close the rear hatch, push it down securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

NISMO models

CAUTION A Do not use the rear spoiler *
Always hold area hatch.
B *

to open or close the rear hatch. Doing so may damage the rear spoiler. to open or close the rear

SPA2580

SECONDARY REAR HATCH RELEASE
The secondary rear hatch release mechanism allows opening the rear hatch in the event of discharged battery or emergency. The release handle is located under the cargo room floor. To open the rear hatch from the passenger compartment, perform the following procedure. 1. Remove the cargo floor mat. 2. Find the rear hatch release handle shown in the illustration.
1 *

SPA2646

as

3. Free the release handle that is fixed with velcro.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

FRONT, SIDE AND REAR UNIQUE PARTS (NISMO models)
4. Firmly pull the release handle until the rear hatch releases. The NISMO models have the following unique parts on the front, side and rear of the vehicle. — Front bumper with an aerodynamic splitter — Side sill extensions — Rear bumper with an aerodynamic diffuser — Large-diameter exhaust pipes These parts are close to the ground and may be damaged if they contact objects such as curbs, parking blocks, etc.

CAUTION
The approach and departure angles are small. Reduce vehicle speed when the vehicle approaches or leaves a steep hill. Otherwise, the front bumper with an aerodynamic splitter, rear bumper with an aerodynamic diffuser and exhaust pipes may contact the road surface and be damaged.

CAUTION
Do not step on the front bumper with an aerodynamic splitter. Doing so could damage it.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-filler door by using one of the following operations, then push the left side of the door. . . . . Push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key carried with you. Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key. Insert the mechanical key into the door lock cylinder and turn it to the rear of the vehicle. Push the power door lock switch to the UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

lock all doors by operating the door handle request switch, the LOCK button on the Intelligent Key, the mechanical key or the power door lock switch.

injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on. . Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers: — Always place the container on the ground when filling. — Do not use electronic devices when filling. — Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it. — Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

FUEL-FILLER CAP
.

WARNING
. Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible

filler tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may malfunction indicator cause the light (MIL) to illuminate. If the light illuminates because the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to light drive the vehicle. The should turn off after a few driving light does not turn trips. If the off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

.

.

CAUTION
. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. Insert the cap straight into the fuelPre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

.

TILT STEERING

WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

.

SPA2582

SPA2583

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. Use the fuel-filler cap holder on the hook while refueling.
A *

MANUAL OPERATION Tilt operation
1 Push the lock lever * down and adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position.

Pull the lock lever up securely to lock the steering wheel in place.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SUN VISORS

MIRRORS

SPA2343

SPA2143
1 The night position * will reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night. 2 Use the day position * when driving in daylight hours.

INSIDE MIRROR
Adjust the height and the angle of the inside mirror to the desired position.

Manual anti-glare type

SIC2872

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing 1 down the main sun visor * . 2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and 2 swing it to the side * .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

D light will turn off. Push the “I” switch * to turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the E sensors * or apply glass cleaner on them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in improper operation. For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver operation, see “HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

SPA2450

SPA2319

Automatic anti-glare type
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the following vehicle. The anti-glare system will be automatically turned on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. When the anti-glare system is turned on, the A indicator light * will illuminate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced.
C Push the “*” switch * to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally. The indicator

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

Adjusting outside mirrors
The outside mirror control switch is located on the armrest.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The outside mirror will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Turn the switch right or left to select the right or 1 left side mirror * , then adjust using the control 2 switch * .

SPA1829

SIC3869

Foldable outside mirrors
Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the rear of the vehicle.

VANITY MIRROR
To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun visor and pull up the cover.

WARNING
. Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electric shock. Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric shock. Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake to view the images on the front center display screen using devices connected to the auxiliary input jacks.

.

.

SAA2273

.

Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme temperature conditions [below −48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)]. Operating this system under these conditions may result in system malfunctions.

6 For the VOICE button * functions, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving. The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be “grayed out” or muted. Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system.

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

CAUTION
. The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material, which contains a small amount of mercury. In case of contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water. To clean the display, use a soft, dry cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel. Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction.

SAA2274

HOW TO USE MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROLLER
Choose an item on the display using the main 2 directional buttons * (or additional directional 3 buttons * with navigation system) or center 5 1 dial * , and push the ENTER button * for operation.
4 If you push the BACK button * before the setup is completed, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen. This button can also be used to delete characters that have been input.

.

.

After the setup is completed, push the BACK 4 button * and return to the previous screen.

Touch screen operation
With this system, the same operations as those for the multi-function controller are possible using the touch screen operation. Selecting the item: Touch an item to select it. To select the “Audio” 1 settings, touch the “Audio” area * on the screen. Touch the BACK previous screen.
2 *

Adjusting an item: Touch the + settings.

Inputting characters:

*
1

or −

*
2

button to adjust the

Touch the letter or number

1 *.

3 4 Touch the UP * or DOWN * button to move to the previous or next page.

Space: Inserts a space. Delete: Deletes the last character that has been input with one touch. Push and hold the button to delete all of the characters.

.

OK: Completes character inputs.

Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the screen.
SAA1454 SAA2143

START-UP SCREEN
When you push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the screen. When you read and agree with the warning, push the ENTER button. If you do not push the ENTER button, you will not be able to use the NAVI system. To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

START MENU
The start menu can be displayed using the ENTER switch on the steering-wheel-mounted controls. 1. While the map or status screen is displayed, push and hold the ENTER switch until the “Menu Options” screen appears. 2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting the ENTER switch up or down, and then push the ENTER switch to select it.

2. Menu Selections: Shows the options to choose within that menu screen. (i.e. Auto Interior Illumination, etc.) 3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator: Shows that the multi-function controller may be used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and select more options. 4. Screen Count: Shows the number of menu selections available for that screen (i.e. 1/9).
SAA1591 SAA1510

Available items
Destination/Route: These items are for the navigation system. See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for details. Information: Displays the information screen. It is the same screen that appears when you push the INFO button. Settings: Displays the settings screen. It is the same screen that appears when you push the SETTING button.

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN
Vehicle functions are viewed on the display screen in menus. Whenever a menu selection is made or menu item is highlighted, different areas on the screen provide you with important information. See the following for details. 1. Header: Shows the path used to get to the current screen. (i.e. push SETTING button > choose “Comfort & Conv.” menu item.)

VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS (models with navigation system) HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON
To display the status of the audio, air conditioner system, fuel consumption and navigation system, push the STATUS button. The following information will appear when the STATUS button is pushed. Audio ? Audio and Air conditioner system ? Audio and fuel consumption ? Audio and Navigation system ? Audio The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle. See the following for details.

HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
Push the “ OFF” button to switch the display brightness to the daytime mode or the nighttime mode, and to adjust the display brightness using the multi-function controller while the indicator is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The display brightness can also be adjusted using the brightness UP button (+) or brightness DOWN button (−). Push and hold the “ OFF” button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the button again to turn the display on.
SAA1545

Vehicle information display
1. Push the INFO button on the control panel. 2. Choose an item using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button. 3. After viewing or adjusting the information on the following screens, push the BACK button to return to the INFORMATION menu. See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for the following items: . . Traffic Info. Where am I?

HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON
The display screen shows vehicle and navigation information for your convenience.

Fuel Economy information
The distance to empty, average fuel economy and current fuel economy (shown on the right side bar) will be displayed for reference. To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use the multi-function controller to highlight the “Reset” key and push the ENTER button. If the “View” key is highlighted with the multifunction controller and the ENTER button is pushed, the average fuel consumption history will be displayed in graph form along with the average for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.
SAA1546

The unit can be converted between “US” and “Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” later in this section.) The fuel economy information may differ from the information displayed on the vehicle information display. This is due to the timing difference in updating the information and does not indicate a malfunction.

Maintenance information display cannot be operated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place to see the information. The unit can be converted between “US” and “Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” later in this section.)

SAA1554

SAA1555

Maintenance information
The maintenance intervals can be displayed for your desired maintenance items. To set the maintenance interval for Reminders 1 to 4, choose an item using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button. You can also set to display a message to remind you that the maintenance needs to be performed. The following example shows how to set Reminder 1. Use the same steps to set the other maintenance information.

1. Reset the driving distance to the new maintenance schedule. 2. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance schedule. To determine the recommended maintenance interval, refer to your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. 3. To display the reminder automatically when the set trip distance is reached, highlight the “Interval Reminder” key with the multifunction controller and push the ENTER button. 4. To return the display to MAINTENANCE INFO., push the BACK button.

the ON position until one of the following conditions is met: . . . “Reset Distance” is selected. “Interval Reminder” is set to OFF. the maintenance interval is set again.

SAA1611

SAA1592

The Reminder will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met: . the vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position. the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position the next time you drive the vehicle after the set value has been reached.

Voice Recognition information
When you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for the first time or if you do not know how to operate it, you can display the voice command list or user guide for confirmation. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later in this section for the details.) Command List: Displays a list of voice commands that the system can recognize.

.

To return to the previous display after the “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, push the BACK button. The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed each time the ignition switch is pushed to

User Guide: Displays a simplified operation manual of the voice recognition system and how to use the voice commands.

SAA1556

SAA1557

HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON
The display as illustrated will appear when the SETTING button is pushed. For navigation settings, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. To show the “Comfort & Conv.” item, push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Audio settings
The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Audio” key with the multi-function controller and pushing the ENTER button. Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade: To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or “Fade” key and adjust it with the multi-function controller. These items can also be adjusted by pushing and turning the AUDIO knob.

Speed Sensitive Vol.: Sound volume is increased according to the vehicle speed. Choose the effect level from OFF (0) to 5.

To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON position, or push and hold the “ OFF” button. Brightness/Contrast/Background Color: To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen, select the “Brightness” or “Contrast” key and push the ENTER button. Then, you can adjust the brightness to “Darker” or “Brighter”, and the contrast to “Lower” or “Higher” using the multi-function controller. For information on the “Background Color” key, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SAA1813

Display settings
The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button, selecting “Display” key with the multi-function controller and pushing the ENTER button. Display: To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button and turn the “Display” indicator off. The other method is to push and hold the “ OFF” button for more than 2 seconds. When any mode button is pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on for further operation. The screen will turn off automatically 5 seconds after the operation is finished.

Navigation settings
For the details of “Navigation” settings, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Volume and Beeps settings
The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Volume and Beeps” key with the multifunction controller and pushing the ENTER button. Guidance Vol.: To adjust the guidance voice volume louder or softer, select the “Guidance Volume” and adjust it with the multi-function controller. You can also adjust the guidance voice volume by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice guidance is being announced. Guidance Voice: When this item is turned to ON, you will hear voice guidance in the navigation operation or in other operations. Ringer Vol./Incoming Call/Outgoing Call: For the details of these items, see “BLUETOOTH ® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM” later in this section. Button Beeps: When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a beep sound when you use a button.
SAA1562

Phone settings
For the details of “Phone” settings, see “BLUETOOTH ® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM” later in this section.

Clock Format: Choose either the 12-hour clock display or the 24-hour clock display. Offset Adjust: Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per minute. Daylight Saving Time: Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time application. Time Zone:
SAA1563

Clock settings
The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Clock” key with the multi-function controller and pushing the ENTER button. On-screen Clock: When this item is turned to ON, a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

Comfort & Conv. settings
The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Comfort & Conv.” key with the multi-function controller and pushing the ENTER button. This key does not appear on the display until the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. Auto Interior Illumination: When this item is turned to ON, the interior lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked. Auto Headlights Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower (left). Auto Headlights Off Delay: Choose the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 second periods. Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: When this item is turned to ON, the wiper interval is adjusted automatically according to the vehicle speed. Selective Door Unlock: When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is

pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 60 seconds. When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock: When this item is turned to ON, door lock/ unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch will be activated. Return All Settings to Default:
SAA1566

Select this item, push the ENTER button and choose “YES” if you want to return all settings to the default.

Others settings
The Others settings display will appear when pushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Others” key with the multi-function controller and pushing the ENTER button. Voice Recognition: For the details of this item, see “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later in this section.

WARNING
. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

.

SAA2276

.

For the models with navigation system, push the “STATUS” button to display the heater and air conditioner status screen. (See “HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON” earlier in this section.)

after the preferred temperature is set manually. ” fan speed control dial and 1. Turn the “ air flow control dial to the “AUTO” position. The air conditioner will automatically turn on. (The “A/C” button indicator light illuminates.) 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. . The temperature can be set within the following range. — For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C) — For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to 328C)
SAA2277

.

1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

“ ” fan speed control dial Temperature control dial* * The display of degrees: “60-75-90” is used for 8F (US). “18-25-32” is used for 8C (Canada). Air flow control dial “A/C” air conditioner button Intake air control button (“ ” outside air and “ ” air recirculation) “ ” rear window defroster button (See “REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

is designed to automatically activate the cooling function when operating the air flow control dial, the “ ” fan speed control dial or the “ ” intake air control button. (The indicator light on the “A/C” button will illuminate.) Push the “A/C” button off when the cooling function is not necessary.

The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. Heating (A/C OFF): The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial and air flow control dial to the “AUTO” position. (The air conditioner will turn on.) 2. Push the “A/C” button to turn off the air

Automatic operation
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO): This mode may be used all year round. The system works automatically to control the inside temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER (Type A)
In your vehicle, the air conditioner system

conditioner. (The “A/C” button indicator light will turn off.) 3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. . The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

mode. . When the air flow control dial is turned to the “ ” or “ ” position, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 238F (−58C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculation mode will automatically be turned off.

Outside air circulation: ” intake air control button to Push the “ draw outside air into the passenger compartment. The indicator light on the “ ” side will come on. Automatic intake air control: In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. To manually control the intake air, push the “ ” intake air control button. To return to the automatic control mode, push the “ ” intake air control button for approximately 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air recirculation and outside air circulation sides) will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically. Air flow control: Turning the air flow control dial selects the air outlet to: : : : : : Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

.

Manual operation
Fan speed control: ” fan speed control dial clockwise Turn the “ (+) or counter clockwise (−) to manually control the fan speed. Turn the dial to the “AUTO” position to return to automatic control of the fan speed. Air recirculation: Push the “ ” intake air control button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the “ ” side will come on. The air recirculation mode cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode “ ”.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging: 1. Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to the desired position. 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the “ position. ”

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. . To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to the maximum position. As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, turn the air flow control dial to the “AUTO” position to return to the auto

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER (Type B) Automatic operation
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO): This mode may be used all year round. The system works automatically to control the inside temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed after the preferred temperature is set manually. 1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator on the button will illuminate and AUTO will be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. . The temperature can be set within the following range. — For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C) — For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to 328C) . The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed will also be controlled automatically.

controlled automatically. . Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise the system may not work properly. Not recommended if windows fog up.

Manual operation
Fan speed control: ” fan speed control dial to Turn the “ manually control the fan speed. Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic control of the fan speed. Air recirculation: Push the “ ” intake air control button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light “ ” will come on. The air recirculation mode cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode “ ”. Outside air circulation: ” intake air control button to Push the “ change the air circulation from the intake air to the outside air. The indicator light “ ” will turn off. Automatic air intake control: In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. To manually control the intake air, push the “ ” intake air control button. To return to the automatic control mode, push the “ ” intake air control button for approximately 2 seconds. The indicator lights will flash twice, and then the intake air will be

.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging: 1. Push the “ ” front defroster button. (The indicator light on the button will come on.) 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. . To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, turn the “ ” fan speed control dial and set it to the maximum position. As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to the auto mode. When the “ ” front defroster button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 238F (−58C) to defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the defogging performance.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. Heating (A/C OFF): The air conditioner does not activate in this mode. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Push the “AUTO” button on. 2. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator will turn off.) 3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. . The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also

controlled automatically. Air flow control: Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to: : : : : Air flows from center and side ventilators. Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air will flow normally from the foot outlets.
A B The sensors * and * on the instrument panel helps maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
SAA2324

To turn the system off
Push the “OFF” button.

The air conditioning system is equipped with an in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. To replace the filter, contact a NISSAN dealer. The filter should be replaced if air flow is extremely decreased or when windows fog up easily when operating heater or air conditioning system.

AUDIO SYSTEM SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
The air conditioning system in your NISSAN is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioning system. (See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.) Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Radio
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position and push the radio band select button to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition switch should be pushed to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality. Radio reception: Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception. However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any mal-

function in your NISSAN radio system. Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception. Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

WARNING
The system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with the proper equipment.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position, usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter, static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the treble setting to reduce the treble response. Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound. AM radio reception:
SAA0306

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped): When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with the satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for the satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data. The satellite radio mode requires an active XM® Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. The satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal. If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite antenna. A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

FM radio reception: Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics. AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The player may skip while driving on rough roads. The CD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pin holes may not work properly. The following CDs may not work properly: — Copy control compact discs (CCCD) .

— CDs with a paper label — CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn CDs. If the CD cannot be played, one of the following messages will be displayed. CHECK DISC: — Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up, etc.). — Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches. PUSH EJECT: This is an error due to the temperature inside the player is too high. Remove the CD by pushing the EJECT button, and after a short time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal. UNPLAYABLE: The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA CD).

. .

.

.

. .

.
SAA0480

— Recordable compact discs (CD-R) — Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) . Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction. — 3.1 in (8 cm) discs — CDs that are not round

Compact Disc (CD) player
. Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/ or CD changer/player. Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

CompactFlash (CF) player (if so equipped)
. . Do not force a CF card into the slot. This could damage the CF card and/or player. During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CF card and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. The CF player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use. Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight. Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly. Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen. We recommend using English language characters with an iPod®. Large video podcast files cause slow responses in the iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover. If the iPod® automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily

black out, but it will soon recover. . Improperly plugging in the iPod may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly. The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation. An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation). Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on the iPod®. The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod®. If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation with Dock connector), do not use very long names for the song title, album name or artist name to avoid the iPod® from resetting itself. Be careful not to do the following, or the cable could be damaged and a loss of function may occur. — Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40 mm) radius minimum). . .
®

— Twist the cable excessively (more than 180 degrees). — Pull or drop the cable. — Close the center console lid on the cable or connectors. — Store objects with sharp edges in the storage where the cable is stored. — Spill liquids on the cable and connectors. Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if the cable and/or connectors are wet. It may damage the iPod®. If the cable and connectors are exposed to water, allow the cable and/or connectors to dry completely before connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it to dry). If the connector is exposed to fluids other than water, evaporative residue may cause a short between the connector pins. In this case, replace the cable, otherwise damage to the iPod® and a loss of function may occur. If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, connectors cracked, contamination such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do not use the cable and contact a NISSAN dealer to replace the cable with a new one. When not in use for extended periods of

time, store the cable in a clean, dust free environment at room temperature and without direct sun exposure. . Do not use the cable for any other purposes other than its intended use in the vehicle. .

digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality. Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music files. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file. Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second. Multisession — Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession. ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, album title, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line on the display. Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and/or other countries.

CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation in the United States of America and/or other countries.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash (CF) with MP3 or WMA
Explanation of terms: . MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD/CF can reduce the file size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t hear. WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

If there is a file in the top level of the disc, “Root Folder” is displayed. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.

SAA1025

Playback order: Music playback order of the CD/CF with MP3 or WMA is as illustrated above. . The folder names of folders not containing MP3/WMA files are not shown in the display.

Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played. Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played. Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed. When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly. Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright. Poor sound quality It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing. Music cuts off or skips Skipping with high bit rate files Move immediately to the next song when playing. The songs do not play back in the desired order. Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty. If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data. When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order. Cause and Countermeasure

FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (models without navigation system)
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this section.

Audio main operation
Head unit: The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and high frequency ranges automatically in both radio reception and CD playback. ON·OFF/Volume control: Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, and then push the PWR button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD or AUX) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. While the system is on, pushing the PWR button turns the system off. Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

The last station played will also come on when the PWR button is pushed to ON. If another audio source is playing when the radio band select button is turned to ON, the audio source will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning): Push the TUNE button for manual tuning. SEEK tuning: Push the SEEK button or to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station. to Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 each for FM1 and FM2) and 6 stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the radio band select button. 2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button. 3. Select the desired station and push and hold the desired station preset buttons 1 to 6 until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 4. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 5. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Push the TUNE or SEEK button to adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, push the MENU button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds.

FM-AM radio operation
radio (FM/AM) band select: Pushing the radio band select button will change the band as follows: AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM When the radio band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played.

Compact Disc (CD) player operation
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, and insert the CD into the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on the disc will appear on the display. If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the CD will play. If the system has been turned off while the CD was playing, pushing the PWR button will start the CD. Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs. PLAY: When the CD (CD play) button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the CD will start to play. When the CD button is pushed with the CD loaded and the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the CD will start to play. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind): When the (fast forward) or (rewind) of the TUNE button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the CD will return to normal play speed.

APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APF REW: (APS FF) of the SEEK button is When pushed while the CD is being played, the next track or the current track on the CD will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through tracks. The CD will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last track on the CD is skipped through, the first track will be played.) When the (APS REW) button is pushed, the track being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through tracks. The CD will go back the number of times the button is pushed. A CD with MP3 or WMA is not supported with this function. REPEAT (RPT)/RANDOM (RDM) play: When the RPT or RDM button is pushed while the CD is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: RPT button: 1 Disc Repeat (Normal play) Û 1 Track Repeat

A CD with MP3 or WMA is not supported with this function. CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected. When this button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will come out and the system will turn off. If the CD comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. SCAN tuning: When the SCAN tuning button is pushed while the CD is being played, the beginning of all the tracks of the CDs will be played for 10 seconds in sequence. Pushing the button again during this 10 second period will stop SCAN tuning.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 10 seconds, SCAN tuning continues to move to the next CD track. AUX (Auxiliary) button: The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers. Push the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (models without navigation system)
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this section. The satellite radio mode requires an active XM® Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. It may take some time to receive the activation signal after subscribing to the XM® Satellite Radio. After receiving the activation signal, an available channel list will be automatically updated in the radio. For XM®, push the ignition switch from LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.

system is on, pushing the ON·OFF button turns the system off. Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume. MUTE button: Push the Push the button to mute the audio sound. button again to release the mute.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation
radio (FM/AM) band select: Pushing the radio band select button will change the band as follows: AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM radio (SAT) band select: Pushing the radio band select button will change the band as follows: XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1 When the radio band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the channel last played. The last channel played will also come on when the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON. The satellite radio mode requires an active XM® Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If another audio source is playing when the radio band select button is turned to ON, the audio source will automatically be turned off and the last radio channel played will come on. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance: To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push the Audio button. When the display shows the setting you want to change (Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade), push the SEEK or TUNE button to set the desired setting. These items can also be adjusted by pushing the AUDIO button. . Speed Sensitive Vol. Sound volume is increased according to the vehicle speed. Choose the effect level from OFF (0) to 5. . Beep tuning When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a beep sound when you use a button.

Audio main operation
Head unit: The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and high frequency ranges automatically in both radio reception and CD playback. ON·OFF/Volume control: Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, and then push the ON·OFF button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD or AUX) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. While the

monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning): . For AM and FM radio Push the TUNE button manual tuning. . For XM® Satellite Radio Push the TUNE button or to seek channels from all of the categories when any CAT is not selected. SEEK tuning/CATEGORY (CAT): . For AM and FM radio Push the SEEK button or to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station. . For XM® Satellite Radio Push the SEEK button or to tune to the first channel of the next or previous category. During satellite radio reception, the following notices will be displayed under certain conditions. . NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the or for . . . .

SAT tuner is connected.) OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off) CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection error) LOADING (When the initial setting is performed) UPDATING (When the satellite radio subscription is not active) SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station/channel. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station/channel.
1 *

2. Tune to the desired station/channel using the SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button. 3. Push and hold the desired radio station 1 6 preset button * to * until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 4. The station indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 5. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that case, reset the desired stations. RADIO DISPLAY change: When the DISP button is pushed while the radio is being played, the audio display will change as follows:

to

6 *

Station memory operations: set for the and XM3), (6 each for for the AM

Eighteen stations/channels can be SAT band (6 each for XM1, XM2 twelve can be set for the FM band FM1 and FM2), and 6 can be set band.

Compact Disc (CD) changer operation
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, push the LOAD button and insert the CD into the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot

and start playing. After loading the CD, the number of tracks on the CD and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the CD will play. If the system has been turned off while the CD was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will start the CD. CD LOAD: To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading position by pushing the CD insert 1 6 select button * to * , then insert the CD. To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in succession, push the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds. The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the display. PLAY: When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with the system off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on and the CD will start to play. When the DISC button is pushed with the CD loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the CD will start to play. When the DISC button is pushed while a CD is loaded and a medium is played using the auxiliary input jacks, you can toggle back and forth between CD and medium. CD DISPLAY information: When the DISP button is pushed while the CD is being played, the audio display will change as follows: CD: CD:

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind):

When the (fast forward) or (rewind) button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the CD will return to normal play speed. CD with MP3 or WMA: When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the folders in the CD will change. When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the CD will play while forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the CD will return to the normal play speed. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: (APS FF) button is pushed while When the the CD is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through programs. The CD will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last program on the CD is skipped through, the first program will be

played.) When the (APS REW) button is pushed, the program being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs. The CD will go back the number of times the button is pushed. CD PLAY selection: To change to another CD already loaded into the 1 player, push the CD play select buttons * to 6 *. REPEAT (RPT) play: When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: (CD)

RANDOM (RDM) play: When the RDM button is pushed while the CD is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: (CD)

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. AUX (Auxiliary) button: The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computer.

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

Push the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected. To eject the discs selected by the CD select button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5 seconds. To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds. When this button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will come out and the system will turn off.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (models with navigation system)
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this section. The satellite radio mode requires an active XM® Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. It may take some time to receive the activation signal after subscribing the XM® Satellite Radio. After receiving the activation signal, an available channel list will be automatically updated in the radio. For XM®, push the ignition switch from LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.

Audio main operation
Head unit: The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and high frequency ranges automatically in both radio reception and CD playback.

ON·OFF/Volume control: Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, and then push the ON·OFF button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD or AUX) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF button turns the system off. Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume. Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance: To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push the Audio control knob. When the display shows the setting you want to change (Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio control knob to set the desired setting. For the other setting methods, see “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” earlier in this section. This vehicle has some sound effect functions as follows: . . Speed Sensitive Vol. Beep tuning

Hawaii and Guam. If another audio source is playing when the radio band select button is turned to ON, the audio source will automatically be turned off and the last radio channel played will come on. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning): . . For AM and FM radio Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual tuning. For XM® Satellite Radio Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek channels from all of the categories when any CAT is not selected. SEEK tuning/CATEGORY (CAT): . For AM and FM radio Push the SEEK/TRACK button or to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station. . For XM® Satellite Radio Push the SEEK/TRACK button or

FM-AM-SAT radio operation
radio (FM/AM) band select: Pushing the radio band select button will change the band as follows: AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM radio (SAT) band select: Pushing the radio band select button will change the band as follows: (With navigation system) XM1 ? XM2 ? XM1 When the radio band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the channel last played. The last channel played will also come on when the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON. The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

For more details, see “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS (models with navigation system)” earlier in this section.

to tune to the first channel of the next or previous category. During satellite radio reception, the following notices will be displayed under certain conditions. . . . . . NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the SAT tuner is connected.) OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off) CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection error) LOADING (When the initial setting is performed) UPDATING (When the satellite radio subscription is not active) SCAN tuning: Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station/channel. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station/channel.

1 *

to

6 *

Station memory operations:

displayed on the screen. . . . . . CH Name Category Name Title Other

Twelve stations/channels can be set for the FM band (6 each for FM1 and FM2) and the SAT radio (6 each for XM1 and XM2), and 6 stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Choose the radio band using the radio band select button. 2. Tune to the desired station/channel using the SEEK/TRACK, SCAN button or the radio TUNE knob. 3. Push and hold the desired station preset 1 6 button * to * until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 4. The station indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 5. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that case, reset the desired stations/channels. Text: When the “Text” key is selected with the multifunction controller on the display and then the ENTER button is pushed while the satellite radio is being played, the text information will be

Compact Disc (CD) player operation
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the CD, the number of tracks on the CD and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the CD will play. If the system has been turned off while the CD was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will start the CD. Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs. PLAY: When the DISC·AUX (CD play) button is pushed with the system off and the CD loaded,

the system will turn on and the CD will start to play. When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the CD loaded and the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the CD will start to play. When the DISC·AUX button is pushed while a CD is loaded and a medium is played using the auxiliary input jacks, you can toggle back and forth between the CD and the medium. Text: When the “Text” key is selected in the screen using the multi-function controller and then the ENTER button is pushed while the CD is being played, the music information below will be displayed on the screen. CD: . . . . . . Disc title Track title

(fast forward) or (rewind) When the button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the CD will return to normal play speed. When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the CD will be played. The multi-function controller can also be used to select tracks when a CD is being played. REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: (CD)

CD EJECT: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected. When this button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will come out and the system will turn off. If the CD comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it.

Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the power of the portable device. With a compatible device connected to the jacks, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the display switches to the AUX mode. The output from the device will be played through the monitor and audio system.

SAA2282

SAA1567

Auxiliary input jacks
The auxiliary input jacks are located in the center console. NTSC compatible devices such as video games, camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks. Compatible audio devices, such as some MP3 players, can also be connected to the system through the auxiliary jacks. The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identification purposes. . . . Yellow - video input White - left channel audio input Red - right channel audio input

Display Mode: The AUX settings display will appear when the “Setting” key is selected using the multifunction controller and pushing the ENTER button. Choose the display mode from the following: . . . Normal Wide Cinema

PLAY: When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the system off and the CF card inserted, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and a CF card is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the CompactFlash mode. Text: When the “Text” key is selected on the screen using the multi-function controller and then the ENTER button is pushed while the CF is being played, the music information below will be displayed on the screen. . . . . . Folder title File Title Song title Album Title Artist

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind)/APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: (fast forward) or (rewind) When the button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the CF card is being played, the CF card will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the CF card will return to the normal play speed. When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the CF card is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the CF card will be played. The multi-function controller can also be used to select tracks when the CF card is being played. Folder selection: To change to another folder in the CF card, turn the MP3/WMA folder selector or choose a folder displayed on the screen using the multifunction controller.

SAA1862

COMPACTFLASH (CF) PLAYER OPERATION (models with navigation system) Audio main operation
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON A position, remove the cover * and insert a CF B card * into the slot. Then, push the button repeatedly to switch to the CompactFlash mode. If the system has been turned off while the CompactFlash (CF) card was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will start the CF card.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): When the RPT button is pushed while the CF card is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet, fully depress the center connector button to unlatch the connector and pull the connector straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the cable from the iPod®, fully depress the side connector buttons and pull the iPod® connector straight out of the iPod®. * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

CF EJECT: When the knob next to the CF slot is pushed with the CF card inserted, the CF card will be ejected. Messages: The following messages will be displayed under certain conditions. . . . . . Reading Compact Flash (The system is reading the CF card inserted in the slot.) No Compact Flash card (A CF card is not inserted in the slot.) Compact Flash read error (The system cannot read a CF card.) Unplayable file (The system cannot play a music file.) No audio file (The CF card inserted in the slot or its folder does not contain any music files.)
SAA2283

Compatibility
The following models are available: . Third generation iPod® (Firmware version 2.3 or later) (Audiobook and Podcast are not available) Fourth generation iPod® (Firmware version 3.1.1 or later) Fifth generation iPod® (Firmware version 1.1.2 or later) iPod® mini (Firmware version 1.41 or later) iPod® photo (Firmware version 1.2.1 or later) iPod® nano (Firmware version 1.2 or later)

iPod® PLAYER OPERATION (if so equipped) Connecting iPod®
1 Open the console lid and connect the cable * as illustrated, and then connect the other end of 2 the cable to your iPod® * . Your vehicle is equipped with the specialized cable for connecting the iPod® to your vehicle audio unit. The battery of your iPod® is charged during the connection to the vehicle.

. . . . .

The display on the iPod® shows a NISSAN screen when the connection is completed. While connecting the iPod® to the vehicle, the iPod® can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated.

Audio main operation
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button

repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode. If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will start the iPod®. DISC·AUX button: When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the system off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the iPod® is connected, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the iPod® mode. Interface: The interface for iPod® operation shown on the vehicle center display is similar to the iPod® interface. Use the multi-function controller and the ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod® with your favorite settings. The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen. For further information about each item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual. . . . . . Playlists Artists Albums Songs Podcasts
®

. . .

Genres Composers Audiobooks

The following touch-panel buttons shown on the screen are also available: . . : returns to the previous screen. : plays/pauses the music selected.

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind)/APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: or button is pushed for When the more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the iPod® will return to the normal play speed. When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod® will be played. The multi-function controller can also be used to select tracks when the iPod® is playing. REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): When the RPT button is pushed while a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

MUSIC BOX HARD-DISK DRIVE (models with navigation system)
The “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system can store songs from CDs being played. The system has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage capacity and can record up to 200 hours (approximately 2,900 songs). The following CDs can be recorded in the “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system. . . . . CDs without MP3/WMA files Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) specification in CD-Extras First session of multisession disc

NOTE: If the hard-disk needs to be replaced due to a malfunction, all stored music data will be erased.

drive. . The skip, fast forward and rewind features are disabled while the CD is recording. The recording process can be stopped at any time. All tracks that were played before the CD was stopped are stored. Individual tracks can be deleted from the hard-disk drive after the CD is recorded.

.

.

SAA1613

Recording CDs
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. For the details of playing CDs, see “Compact Disc (CD) changer operation” earlier in this section. 2. Select the “REC” key using the multifunction controller and push the ENTER button. NOTE: . The system starts playing and recording the 1st track on the CD when the “REC” key is selected. . Individual tracks from a CD cannot be recorded to the “Music Box” hard-disk

There is not enough space in the hard-disk The number of albums reaches the maximum of 500. The number of tracks reaches the maximum of 3,000.

Automatic recording: If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. (See “Music Box settings” later in this section.) Stopping recording:
SAA1614

If the title information of the track being recorded is stored either in the hard-disk drive or in the CD, the title is automatically displayed on the screen. For title acquisition from the hard-disk drive, music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. To view the details of the track, select the “Text” key by touching the screen or using the multifunction controller. The track name and album title are displayed on the screen. If a track is not recorded successfully due to skipping sounds, the mark is displayed behind the track number. The “Music Box” hard-disk drive cannot perform recording under the following conditions.

To stop the recording, select the STOP button by touching the screen or using the multifunction controller. If the CD is ejected, the audio system is turned off or the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position, the recording also stops.

SAA1615

Playing recorded songs
Select the “Music Box” audio system by using one of the following methods. . Push the source select switch on the steering wheel repeatedly until the center display changes to the Music Box mode. (See “STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CONTROLS FOR AUDIO” later in this section.) Push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the Music Box mode. Give voice commands. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models

with navigation system)” later in this section.) Stopping playback: The system stops playing when: a. b. c. another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash or AUX) is selected. the audio system is turned off. the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position. FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind)/APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: (fast forward) or (rewind) When the button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while a track is being played, the track will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the track will return to the normal play speed. When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a track is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track will be played. The multi-function controller can also be used to select tracks when a track is being played.

Play mode selection: To change to another album or artist, turn the MP3/WMA folder selector. REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): When the RPT·RDM button is pushed while a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

SAA1684

There are some options available during playback. Select one of the following that are displayed on the screen, if necessary. Menu: Refer to the following information for each item. . Play by Artist Plays songs by an artist whose music is currently being played. The artists are sorted in alphabetical order.

Play by Category Plays music from one of the following categories: My Favorites, Hit Songs, Kids’ Songs and Rarely Played.

.

Search Artists Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order. Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks by the artist and starts playing the first track.

SAA1685

SAA1686

.

Play by Album Plays tracks in each album. The albums are sorted in alphabetical order.

.

Search Albums Displays a list of albums in order of the date when they were stored in the system. Selecting an album displays all of the tracks on the album and starts playing the first track. Select the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in one of the following order: Rec. (Recorded) Date, Name, Release Year, Artist.

.

Play by Date Plays tracks in each album. The albums are sorted in order of the date when they were stored in the system.

.

Play by Mood Plays music from one of the following moods: Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow Music and Upbeat Music. .

Search Song Details Set the conditions and select the “Start Song Search” key to search for a desired song that is stored in the system. The conditions are as follows:

and “Remaining Time” is displayed.) b. Mood Categories (Number of saved tracks and their categories (Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow Music, Upbeat Music and Others) are displayed.) c. Deleted Items (Information about the deleted tracks is displayed.) d. Search Missing Titles If titles are not displayed for CDs that have been recorded, titles can be acquired using one of the following methods: — Retrieve from HDD Searches the title using the database in the hard-disk. — Retrieve from CF Searches the title from the information acquired on the Internet. Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for details. — Transfer Missing Titles to CF Transfers the information of the album recorded without titles to a CompactFlash card. Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for details. e. Music Box Settings (See “Music Box settings” later in this section.)

f. CDDB Version (the version of the built-in Gracenote Database is displayed.)

Deleted music data can be restored by performing the following. 1. Select the “Menu” key and then the “Music Box System Info.” key on the screen. 2. Select the “Deleted Items” key and then the “Album/Track” key. 3. Select the “Restore Album/Track” key to restore the deleted music data. You can also listen to the beginning of each track that has been deleted by performing the following. 1. Select the “Menu” key and then the “Music Box System Info.” key on the screen. 2. Select the “Deleted Items” key and then the “Play Sample” key.

SAA1616

Text: Refer to the following information for each item. . Set Mood Set the mood category of the track to “Relaxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow Music” or “Upbeat Music”. . . Delete Track Delete the track being played. Edit Info. Edit the name of the track being played and its artist using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH

Music Box settings
To set the Music box hard drive to your preferred settings, select the “Menu” key during playback, “Music Box System Info.” key, and “Music Box Settings” key with the multi-function controller, and then push the ENTER button. Automatic Recording: When this item is turned to ON, the Music Box hard drive automatically starts recording when a CD is inserted. Recording Quality: Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132 kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.

Title Text Priority: Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc Data Base) to acquire track information from the Gracenote Database or set to CD TEXT to acquire the information from CDs. Delete ALL Music Box Data: Delete all music data stored on the hard-disk.

information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this device. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique

identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote MusicID Service. The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its online services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRING E M E N T. G R A C E N OT E D O E S N OT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

Gracenote
NOTE: . The information contained in the Gracenote Database is not fully guaranteed. . The service of the Gracenote Database on the Internet may be stopped without prior notice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW. Gracenote® MusicID® Terms of Use This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to do online disc identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. Copyright: Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, C Inc., copyright * 2000-2007 Gracenote. C Gracenote Software, copyright * 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
SAA0451

.

A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. Never touch the terminal portion of the CompactFlash cards. Do not bend the cards. Always place the cards in the storage case when they are not being used. Do not place heavy objects on the cards. Do not store the cards in highly humid locations. Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight. Do not spill any liquids on the cards.

CF cards
.

. . . . .

CD/CF (CompactFlash) CARE AND CLEANING CD
. . . Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc. Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.

STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CONTROLS FOR AUDIO ENTER (models with navigation system) or tuning (models without navigation system) switch
Push the switch upward or downward to select a station, track, CD or folder when they are listed on the display. You can also use the ENTER switch to select the items on the usual setting menu screen. After selecting an MP3 folder using the up and down switch, push the ENTER switch to complete the selection. While the display is in the NAVI, STATUS or Audio setting screen, some audio functions can also be controlled using the ENTER switch. The function varies depending on if you push the switch shorter (less than 1.5 seconds) or longer (more than 1.5 seconds). RADIO: .
SAA2158
Without navigation system

Next track or the beginning of the current track . Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Disc change (if so equipped) (When only one disc is loaded, the 1st track of the disc will be selected.) CD/CF with MP3/WMA (if so equipped): . Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

SAA2157
With navigation system

Next track or the beginning of the current track . Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Folder change (When the last folder on a disc is playing, the next disc will be selected.) iPod® (models with navigation system): . Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Pushing DOWN “

”/UP “

” shorter

Next or previous preset station

Previous or next track (Start/Pause or Menu can be selected when the ENTER button is pushed.)

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
. Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer . Models without navigation system AM ? FM ? CD ? AUX ? SAT* *: if so equipped When installing a car phone or a CB radio in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the electronic control modules and electronic control system harness.

WARNING
A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving. If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands-free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

Next track or the beginning of the current track . Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Playlist change (When the last playlist is playing, the next playlist will be selected.)

CAUTION
. Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise. When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth. .

BACK switch
Push this switch to go back to the previous screen or cancel the selection if it is not completed. .

Volume control switches
Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch to increase or decrease the volume.

CAUTION
. Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules. Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. .

WARNING
Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If you find yourself unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

procedure is required anymore. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position with the registered cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. The NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands, so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible. For more details, see “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later in this section; page 4-82. Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. .
®

.

.

.

. .

CAUTION
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine. Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can make or receive a telephone call with your cellular phone in your pocket.

Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list. You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:

.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the invehicle phone module, no phone connecting

— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone service area. — Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, behind a tall building or in a mountainous area. — Your cellular phone is locked in order not to be dialed. . When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call. Immediately after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time. Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the invehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System seems to be malfunctioning, please visit .

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help. Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone pairing procedure specific to your phone, battery charging, cellular phone antenna, etc. The antenna display on the monitor will not coincide with the antenna display of some cellular phones. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as well as to minimize its echoes. If reception between callers is unclear, adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve the clarity.

— Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause interference and 2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device

.

IC Regulatory information
— Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. — This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations. Bluetooth trademark:
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.

VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For more details, see “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation

2. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the name list of the phones, and push the ENTER button.

3. When a PIN code appears on the screen, operate the compatible Bluetooth® cellular phone to enter the PIN code. The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for the details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on pairing NISSAN recommended cellular phones. When the pairing is completed, the screen will return to the Bluetooth® setup display.

PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION
Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the phonebook. 1. Push the SETTING button, and select the “PHONE” key on the display using the multi-function controller. Then push the ENTER button. 2. Select the “Phonebook” key, and push the ENTER button. 3. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the name list of the phonebook, and push the ENTER button.

To confirm the stored voicetags, select the “Voicetag Directory” key using the multi-function controller, and push the ENTER button. There are different methods to input a phone number. Select one of the following options instead of “Transfer via Bluetooth” in step 4 above.

.

— Enter Data by Keypad Input the name and phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier in this section.) — Copy from Downloaded Phonebook Copy a phonebook from the Bluetooth® cellular phone. The availability of this function depends on each cellular phone. The copying procedure also varies according to each cellular phone. See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for more details. — Copy from Outgoing Call Logs Store the name and phone number from the outgoing call list. — Copy from Incoming Call Logs Store the name and phone number from the incoming call list.

SAA1575

SAA1576

4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key, and push the ENTER button in order to register your cellular phone memory in the phonebook. 5. Operate the cellular phone to send a person’s name and phone number from the memory of the cellular phone. The memory sending procedure from the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone manufacturer. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for more details.

6. After the memory is registered in the phonebook, the system will ask if you want to add a voicetag for it. If you want to add a voicetag, select the “YES” key on the “Add a voicetag?” screen. For example, if the partner’s name is David, speak “David” after a tone. The “David” voicetag is stored in the phonebook. Voicetags allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later in this section; page 4-82.) 7. When the phonebook registration is completed, the screen will return to the name list of the phonebook.

4. After the call is over, perform one of the following to finish the call. a. Select the “Hang up” key and push the ENTER button. b. Push the wheel. button on the steering

c. Push the PHONE button on the instrument panel. There are different methods to make a call. Select one of the following options instead of “Call (Phonebook)” in step 2 above.
SAA1895

.

Redial Dials the previously called number by the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedures below. 1. Push the PHONE button on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear on the display. 2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on the “PHONE” menu, and push the ENTER button. 3. Select the registered person’s name from the list, and push the ENTER button. Dialing will start and the screen will change to the call-in-progress screen. .

Call (Call Logs) Select the name or phone number from the incoming or outgoing call logs.

.

Call (Downloaded) Select the name or phone number from the downloaded call list.

.

Dial (Keypad) Input the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier in this section.)

Answer Accept an incoming call to talk. On Hold Put an incoming call on hold. Reject Call Reject an incoming call. To finish the call, perform one of the following procedures listed below.

a) Select the “Hang up” key on the display and push the ENTER button.
SAA1578

RECEIVING A CALL
When you hear a phone ring, the display will change to the incoming call mode. To receive a call, perform one of the following procedures listed below. a) Select the “Answer” key on the display and push the ENTER button. b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument panel. c) Push the button on the steering wheel.

b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument panel. c) Push the button on the steering wheel.

SAA1579

DURING A CALL
There are some options available during a call. Select one of the following displayed on the screen if necessary. . . . Hang up Finish the call. Use Handset Transfer the call to the cellular phone. Mute Mute your voice to the person.

There are some options available when receiving a call. Select one of the following displayed on the screen.

Keypad Send a dial tone to the caller for using network services such as voice mail.

.

Cancel Mute This will appear after “Mute” is selected. Mute will be canceled.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or −) on the steering wheel or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone. This adjustment is also available in the SETTING mode.
SAA1580 SAA1581

PHONE SETTING
To set up the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System to your preferred settings, push the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the “PHONE” key on the display, and then push the ENTER button.
®

Downloaded Phonebook
Refer to the following information for each item. . Download All Download all of the contacts registered in the Bluetooth® cellular phone. Availability of this function depends on each cellular phone. The memory downloading procedure from the cellular phone also varies according to each cellular phone. See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for more details. . Delete Downloaded Phonebook Delete a downloaded phonebook.

Phonebook
See “PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION” earlier in this section for adding, editing and deleting a contact.

Priority Change Use this command to change the priority level of the active phone. The priority level determines which phone will be connected to the system when more than one paired Bluetooth® phone is in the vehicle. The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5). If the new priority level is already being used for another phone, the two phones will swap priority levels. For example, if the current priority levels are: Priority Level 1 = Phone A Priority Level 2 = Phone B Priority Level 3 = Phone C and you change the priority level of Phone C to Level 1, then: Priority Level 1 = Phone C Priority Level 2 = Phone B Priority Level 3 = Phone A

.

Paired Phone List Up to 5 registered cellular phones are shown on the list. If you select a cellular phone that is different from the one currently being connected, the newly selected phone will be connected to the system.

Automatic Hold
If this item is turned on, an incoming call will be placed on hold automatically after several rings.

Use Vehicle Ringtone
If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is different from the cellular phone’s will sound when receiving a call.

.

Edit Phone Name Rename the registered cellular phones using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier in this section.)

Delete Call Logs
Delete all of the incoming or outgoing call logs from the list.

Bluetooth Setup
See the following information for each item. . Bluetooth If this setting is turned off, the connection between the cellular phone and the invehicle phone module will be canceled. . Bluetooth Info Check information about the device name, device PIN and connection status.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later in this section; page 4-82.) 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. System fails to interpret the command correctly. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag. 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION” earlier in this section.) 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

WARNING
. Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If you find yourself unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

.

SAA2316

CAUTION
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in your pocket. Once your cellular phone is paired to the invehicle phone module, no other phone connect-

ing procedure is required anymore. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position with the registered cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. . Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. . Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa. com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list. You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions: — Your vehicle is outside of the telephone service area. — Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area. — Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed. When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call. Immediately after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time. Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the invehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection disruption. While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System seems to be malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide” later in this section. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help. Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone pairing procedure specific to your phone, battery charging, cellular phone antenna, etc. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as well as to minimize its echoes. If reception between callers is unclear, adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve the clarity. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 8 in (20 cm) between the radiator and your body. This Transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

.

USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System. If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. If the button is pushed before the initialization completes, the system will announce “Hands-free phone system not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe the following: . Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly. Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly. Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds. Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

.

If a command is not recognized, the system announces, “Command not recognized. Please try again.” Repeat the command in a clear voice. If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime the system is waiting for a response. You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can also push the button on the steering wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system. If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, push the volume control switch (+ or −) on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob. .

oh”, or — “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh” Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only. Example: 1-800-662-6200 — “One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”, — NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred, and — NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred. . Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The system will prompt you to continuing entering digits, if desired. Example: 1-800-662-6200 — “One eight zero zero” The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more. — “six six two” The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more. — “six two zero zero” . You can say “Star” for “*” and “Pound” for “#” at any time in any position of the phone

.

.

.

. .

.

Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push and release the button located on the steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a command. The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted. . If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say “Help” and the system will repeat them.

How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the rules and examples below. . Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. Example: 1-800-662-6200 — “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh

number. (Available only when using the “Call International” command.) Example: 1-555-1212 *123 — “One five five five one two one two star one two three” . . Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using the “Call International” command). Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available only when storing a phone book number). See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section and “Call” later in this section for more information. NOTE: For best results, say phone numbers as single digits. The voice command “Help” is available at any time. Please say the “Help” command to get information about how to use the system.

MODE/PHONE END Push the end a call. button to cancel a VR session or

GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For additional command options, refer to “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

Choosing a language
SAA2286

You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System using English, Spanish or French. To change the language, perform the following. 1. Press and hold the than 5 seconds. button for more

CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System are located on the steering wheel. TALK/PHONE SEND Push the button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming call. You can also use the button to skip through system feedback and to enter commands during a call. See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section and “DURING A CALL” earlier in this section for more information.

2. The system announces: “Press the PHONE SEND ( ) button for the hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END ( ) button to select a different language.” 3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” later in this section. 4. The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the

language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in French). Use the following chart to select the language. NOTE: You must press the button or the button within 5 seconds to change the language.
Current language English Spanish French Press (TALK/PHONE SEND) to select Spanish English English Press (MODE/ PHONE END) to select French French Spanish

Pairing procedure

number of phones paired. The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa. com/bluetooth for instructions on pairing NISSAN recommended cellular phones. 5. The system asks you to say a name for the E phone * . If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Also, if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name already used, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. 6. The system asks you to assign a priority level F * . The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Bluetooth® phone is in the vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the system or refer to “Setup” later in this section for more information on changing priorities. 7. The system will ask if you would like to G select a custom ring tone * . Follow the instructions provided by the system or refer to “Setup” later in this section for more information on selecting ringtones.

1. Push the button on the steering wheel. The system announces the available commands.
A 2. Say: “Setup” * . The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.

5. If you decide not to change the language, do not press either button. After 5 seconds, the VR session will end, and the language will not be changed.

3. Say: “Pair phone” * . The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.
B C 4. Say: “New phone” * . The system acknowledges the command and asks you to D initiate pairing from the phone handset * .

When you are asked to enter a PIN code for pairing your Bluetooth® cellular phone, operate it to enter the code “1234”. The code is always “1234” regardless of the

Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel. Once the call has ended, press the on the steering wheel. button

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands currently available anytime the system is waiting for a response. If you want to end an action without completing it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at anytime the system is waiting for a response. The system will end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system. If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime the system is waiting for a response. When you get used to the menus in the system, you can talk ahead by saying more than one command at a time. For example, say, “Call five five five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.” Also, when you get used to the system responses, you can skip ahead to the tone by pressing the button on the steering wheel. However, if you press the button when the system is waiting for a response from you it will end the VR session.

1. Push the button on steering wheel. A tone will sound. 2. Say: “Call” * . The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.
A B Say: “Call International” * to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters. C 3. Say the number you wish to call * . For example, 555-1212 can be said as “five five five one two one two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section for more information.

NOTE: If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel to reject the call. For additional command options, see “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

4. When you have finished speaking the phone number, the system repeats it back and announces the available commands.
D 5. Say: “Dial” * . The system acknowledges the command and makes the call.

When you push and release the button on the steering wheel, you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu. The following pages describe these commands and the commands in each sub-menu. Remember to wait for the tone before speaking.

For additional command options, see “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

earlier in this section and “Making a call by entering a phone number” earlier in this section for more details. “Redial”
C *

command, the system will prompt you to speak the number you wish to enter. During a call During a call there are several command options available. Press the button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter commands. . . “Help” — The system announces the available commands. “Go back/Correction” — The system announces “Go back,” ends the VR session and returns to the call. “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces “Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns to the call. “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send command to enter numbers during a call. For example, if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system: Say: “Send one two three four.” The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers. The system then ends the VR session and returns to the call. . “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call command to transfer the call from the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to

Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed within the vehicle. NOTE: The system will not redial the last number dialed by the handset keypad. The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing. If a redial number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to redial” and ends the VR session. “Call back”
D *

Name (speak name)

A *

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you can dial a number associated with a name and location. See “Phone book” later in this section to learn how to store entries. When prompted by the system, say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call. The system acknowledges the name. If there are multiple locations associated with the name, the system asks you to choose the location. Once you have confirmed the name and location, the system begins the call. Number (speak digits)
B *

.

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle. The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing. If a call back number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to call back” and ends the VR session. International When you would like to enter a phone number other than in 3-3-4 digit format, say “international”. When the system acknowledges this

.

When prompted by the system, say the number you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”

the cellular phone when privacy is desired. The system announces, “Transfer call. Call transferred to privacy mode.” The system then ends the VR session. You can also issue the Transfer Call command again to return to a hands-free call through the vehicle. . “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it. Use the mute command again to unmute your voice.

have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associated with it. NOTE: Each phone has its own separate phone book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B. “New entry”
A *

To enter a phone number by voice command: For example, say: “five five five one two one two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section for more information. To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory (if so equipped): Say: “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset. The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® communication link. The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit www. nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones. The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers, choose “Store.” The system confirms the name, location and number. The system then asks if you would like to store another location for the same name. If you do not wish to store another location, the system ends the VR session.

Use the New Entry command to store a new name in the system. When prompted by the system, say the name you would like to give the new entry. For example, say: “Mary.” If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Also, if the name sounds too much like a name already stored, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Once the system accepts the name and you confirm it is correct, the system asks for a location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other). For example, say: “Home.”

NOTE: If the other party ends the call or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature may need to be reset to “off.”

Phone book
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each phone paired with the system. Each name can

The system acknowledges the location. The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone number to an existing entry. When prompted by the system, say the name of the entry you wish to edit. The system acknowledges the name and asks you for the location you would like to edit. Say the name of the location. The system acknowledges the location. The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory. To enter a phone number by voice command: For example, say: “five five five one two one two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section for more information. To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory (if so equipped): Say: “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset. The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® communication link. The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit www. nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones. The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers, choose “Store.” The system confirms the name, location and number, then announces that the entry has been stored. The system then ends the VR session. “Delete”
C *

If there is no number for the entry you are trying to delete, the system says so and ends the VR session. “List names”
D *

Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book. The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. When the playback of the list is complete, the system returns to the main menu. You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the button on the steering wheel. The system ends the VR session.

Use the Delete command to erase one entry from the phone book, all entries from the phone book, the current redial number or the current call back number. To delete entries from the phone book, say a name or “All entries” when prompted by the system. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to confirm the deletion. To delete the current redial number or call back number, say “redial number” or “call back number” when prompted by the system. If a redial number or a call back number exists, the system deletes them without asking for confirmation.

Memo pad

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice memos, each up to 20 seconds long. “Play”
A *

The system plays back all the memos in the order of newest to oldest. The system ends the VR session.

If there are no memos recorded, the system announces “No messages to play.” The system ends the VR session. “Record”
B *

Setup

existing phone. If you try to pair a phone that has already been paired to your vehicle’s system, the system announces the name the phone is already using. The pairing procedure will then be cancelled. When prompted by the system, choose from the following commands: . . “New phone” — Refer to “PAIRING PROCEDURE” earlier in this section. “Replace phone” — The system announces the names of the phones already paired and asks which you would like to replace. Once you say the name of the phone you wish to replace, the paring procedure will begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in this section. . “List phones” — See the description below.
B *

The system announces “Recording” and a tone sounds signaling you to begin. Speak the information you wish to record clearly. When you are done, press the or button on the steering wheel. A tone sounds and the system announces “Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end the VR session. If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish to record over the oldest memo. “Delete”
C *

Use the Setup command to change options associated with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. “Pair phone”
A *

The Delete command erases all memos. The system asks you to confirm this action before deleting all memos.

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compatible phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. When you are asked to enter a PIN code for pairing your Bluetooth® cellular phone, operate it to enter the code “1234”. The code is always “1234” regardless of the number of phones paired. Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a sixth phone, the system announces that you must first delete one phone or replace an

“List phones”

Use the List Phones command to hear the names of the phones currently paired. If no phones are paired, the system announces, “No paired phones to list.” The system then ends the VR session. “Select phone”
C *

Use the Select Phone command to select a phone of lesser priority when two or more

phones paired with Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System are in the vehicle at the same time. The system asks you to name the phone and confirm the selection. Once the selection is confirmed, the selected phone remains active until the ignition switch is turned OFF or you select a new phone. “Change priority”
D *

following commands: . “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone and asks if you would like to select that tone. If you say no, the system plays the next ringtone available and continues to cycle through the ringtones until you select one or quit. “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm your wish to disable the ringtone.
G *

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. The system announces the names of the phones already paired with the system and their priority level. The system then gives you the option to delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the list again. Once you chose to delete a phone or all phones, the system asks you to confirm this action. NOTE: When you delete a phone, the associated phone book for that phone will also be deleted. “Select ringtone”
F *

.

Use the Change Priority command to change the priority level of the active phone. The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Bluetooth® phone is in the vehicle. The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5). If the new priority level is already being used for another phone, the two phones will swap priority levels. For example, if the current priority levels are: Priority Level 1 = Phone A Priority Level 2 = Phone B Priority Level 3 = Phone C and you change the priority level of Phone C to

“Bluetooth off”

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. When Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System is off, you will not be able to make or receive calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you will not have access to the Phone Book. You can still use the Memo Pad and access Setup. To turn on the system again, choose the Bluetooth On command from the Setup command.

Use the Select Ringtone command to select the tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is received. The system announces the name of the active phone and asks you to choose from the

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of dialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of commands, the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system.

The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for memory A and memory B. If memory A is available, the system will use memory A to store the model. If memory A is in use and memory B is available, the system will use memory B to store the model. If both of the memory locations are in use, the system will ask the user to select which memory location should be overwritten.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory locations are already in use, the system will prompt you to overwrite one. Follow the instructions provided by the system. 7. When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin, press the button. 8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the instructions provided by the system. 9. When training is finished, the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded. 10. The system will ask you to say your name. Follow the instructions to register your name. 11. The system will announce that speaker adaptation has been completed and the system is ready. The SA mode will stop if: . . . The button is pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode. The vehicle is driven during SA mode. The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or LOCK position.

Training phrases
During the SA mode, the system instructs you to say the following phrases. (The system will prompt you for each phrase.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . phone book new entry dial three oh four two nine delete call back number setup pair phone memo pad play eight pause nine three two pause seven delete all entries call seven two four zero nine phone book delete entry memo pad record dial star two one seven oh Yes No select ring tone dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on setup change priority

Training procedure
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location. 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine running, the parking brake on, and the transmission in Park. 3. Press and hold the than 5 seconds. button for more

4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE SEND ( ) button for the hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END ( ) button to select a different language.” 5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different language, see “Choosing a language” earlier in this section.

call three one nine oh two nine seven pause pause three oh eight Cancel call back number call star two zero nine five delete phone dial eight three zero five one Home four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number phone book list names call eight oh five four one Correction setup change ring tone dial seven four oh one eight setup main menu Delete dial nine seven two six six memo pad delete call seven six three oh one

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section. 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. System fails to interpret the command correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. 6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” earlier in this section. 1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by The system consistently selects the wrong entry from using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section. the phone book. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)
NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free operation of the systems equipped on this vehicle in one of two modes, Standard Mode or Alternate Command Mode. In Standard Mode, commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system. You can complete your desired operation by simply following the prompts given by the system. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE” later in this section for details.) In this mode, hands-free operation of Audio, Air Conditioner and Display is not available through NISSAN Voice Recognition. For advanced operation, you can use the Alternate Command Mode that enables the operation of the display, audio, and air conditioner through NISSAN Voice Recognition. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE” later in this section for details.) When this mode is active, an expanded list of commands can be spoken after pushing the TALK switch, and the voice command menu prompts are turned off. Note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and the ways of speaking each command are increased. For U.S. customers, the Standard Mode is selected by default. For Canadian customers, the Alternate Command Mode is the default mode. To switch one mode to another, see each mode description later in this section. To improve the recognition success rate when Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode. Otherwise, it is recommended that Alternate Command Mode be turned off and Standard Mode be used for the best recognition performance. For the voice commands for the navigation system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual of your vehicle.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE
The following section is applicable when the Standard Mode is activated. (This mode is selected by default for U.S. customers.) The Standard Mode enables you to complete the desired operation by simply following the prompts that appear on the display and also are announced by the system. Hands-free operation of Audio, Air Conditioner and Display systems is not available in this mode.

SAA1566

Activating Standard Mode
When the Alternate Command Mode is active, perform the following steps to switch to the Standard Mode. 1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel. 2. Highlight the “Others” key on the display and then push the ENTER button. 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and then push the ENTER button.

Available items: . Getting Started Describes the basics of how to operate the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. . Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation. . Finding a Street Address Tutorial for entering a destination by street address.
SAA1917 SAA2164

.

Help on Speaking Displays useful tips of speaking for correct command recognition by the system.

4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode” key and push the ENTER button. 5. The indicator turns off and the Standard Mode activates.

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument panel. 2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button. 3. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button. 4. Highlight an item using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button. You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say “Help”. .

Displaying user guide
If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for the first time or you do not know how to operate it, you can display the User Guide for confirmation. You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide, which contains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands.

Note that the Command List feature is only available when Alternate Command Mode is active.

Getting Started
Before using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for the first time, you can confirm how to use commands by viewing the Getting Started section of the User Guide. 1. Highlight “Getting Started” and push the ENTER button. 2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the multi-function controller. Tutorials on the operation of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system If you choose “Finding a Street Address” or “Placing Calls”, you can view tutorials on how to perform these operations using NISSAN Voice

Useful tips for correct operation
You can display useful speaking tips to help the system recognize your voice commands correctly. Highlight “Help on Speaking” and push the ENTER button.

commands. If the TALK switch is pushed before the initialization completes, the display will show the message: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.” or a beep sounds.

Before starting
To get the best recognition performance from NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe the following: . The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice commands. Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Speak in a natural conversational voice without pausing between words. If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan speed is automatically lowered so that your commands can be recognized more easily.

SAA2166

SAA2167

Voice recognition settings
The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system are described. 1. Highlight “Voice Recognition Settings” and push the ENTER button. 2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the multi-function controller.

. . .

Giving voice commands
1. Push the TALK steering wheel. switch located on the

USING THE SYSTEM Initialization
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

shown on the display and spoken through voice menu prompts. Commands other than those that are displayed are not accepted. Please follow the prompts given by the system. . If the command is not recognized, the system announces, “Please say again”. Repeat the command in a clear voice. Push the BACK button once to return to the previous screen. If you want to cancel the command, push and hold the TALK switch. The message, “Voice cancelled” will be announced. Push the TALK switch to pause the operation. Push the TALK switch again to restart the operation. If you want to adjust the volume of the system feedback, push the volume control buttons [+] or [−] on the steering switch or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement.

General rule Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.) Examples . 1-800-662-6200 — “One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero” Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone numbers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers. For example, when you try to call 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and the system will then ask you for the next three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition, the system will then ask for the last four digits. Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition performance. When speaking a house number, speak the number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is included in the house number, it will not be recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you speak “oh” instead of “zero”. You can only say “zero” for “0 (zero)”.

. .
SAA1908

2. A list of commands appears on the screen, and the system announces, “Would you like to access Phone, Navigation, Information or Help?”. 3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to , speak a command. 4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts and speak after the tone sounds until your desired operation is completed. Operating tips: . . Say a command after the tone. Commands that are available are always

.

.

How to speak numbers: NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands. Refer to the following examples.

Phone Command:
Action
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits. Makes a call to the latest dialed number. Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook. Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken. Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized. (Available during phone number entry)

Voice command examples
To use the NISSAN Voice Recognition function, speaking one command is sometimes sufficient, but at other times it is necessary to speak two or more commands. As examples, some additional basic operations by voice commands are described here. For navigation system commands, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SAA2167

SAA1908

Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone number 800-662-6200: 1. Push the TALK steering wheel. switch located on the

2. The system announces, “Would you like to access Phone, Navigation, Information or Help?” 3. Speak “Phone”.

You can only say a phone number using the 3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using this command. Please use the “International Call” command for all other formats. If you say “Change Number” during phone number entry, the system will automatically request that you repeat the number using the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the area code first and then follow the prompts. Do not add a “1” in front of the area code when speaking phone numbers. If the system does not recognize your command, please try repeating the command using a natural voice. Speaking too slow or too loudly may further decrease recognition performance.

.

. .
SAA1912 SAA1913

8. The system announces, “Please say the last four digits” or say change number. 9. Speak “6 2 0 0”.

10. The system announces, “Dial or Change Number?” 11. Speak “Dial”. 12. The system makes a call to 800-620-6200. Note: . You can also speak “800-620-6200” (10 continuous digits) or “620-6200” (7 continuous digits), if the area code is not necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is recommended for improved recognition. (See “How to speak numbers” earlier in this section.)

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE
The following section is applicable when Alternate Command Mode is activated. (This mode is selected by default for Canadian customers.) The Alternate Command Mode enables the operation of the display, audio, and air conditioner through Voice Recognition. When this mode is active, an expanded list of commands can be spoken after pushing the TALK switch, and the voice command menu prompts are turned off.
SAA1914 SAA1915

5. Speak “01181111222333”.

6. Speak “Dial”. 7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-2223333. Note: Any digit input format is available in the International Number input process.

Please note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and ways of speaking each command are increased. To improve the recognition success rate, try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode. (See “Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate Command Mode)” later in this section.) In the Alternate Command Mode, review the expanded command list for this mode, as some commands available in the Standard Mode are replaced. Please see the examples on the screen.

Activating Alternate Command Mode
When the Standard Mode is active, perform the following steps to switch to the Alternate Command Mode. 1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel. 2. Highlight the “Others” key on the display and then push the ENTER button. 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and then push the ENTER button.

4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode” key and push the ENTER button. 5. The confirmation message is displayed on the screen. Push the “OK” key to activate the Alternate Command Mode.

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument panel. 2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button. 3. Highlight the “Command List” key using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button. You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say “Help”.

Displaying command list
If you are controlling the system by voice commands for the first time or do not know the appropriate voice command, perform the following procedure for displaying the voice command list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).

4. Highlight a category using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button.

5. Highlight an item using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button. 6. If necessary, scroll the screen using the multi-function controller to view the entire list. 7. Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen.

List of help commands
Navigation Commands: See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. Phone Commands:
COMMAND Redial Dial Number Phonebook Outgoing Calls Incoming Calls International Call Redials the phone number last dialed. Dials the phone number given in the command. Shows the first page of the “Phonebook” list. Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5). Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5). Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken. ACTION

Displaying user guide
You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide, which contains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands. 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument panel. 2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button. 3. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button.

4. Highlight an item using the multi-function controller and push the ENTER button. Available items: . Getting Started Describe the basics of how to operate the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. . Using the Address Book Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Manual. . Finding a Street Address (if so equipped) Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

USING THE SYSTEM Initialization
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If the TALK switch is pushed before the initialization completes the display will show the message: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.” or a beep sounds.

Before starting
To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe the following:

Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly. When the air conditioner is in the AUTO mode, the fan speed decreases automatically for easy recognition. Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command. Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

.

. .

SAA2167

SAA1932

Giving voice command
1. Push and release the TALK located on the steering wheel. switch

2. A list of commands appears on the screen, and the system announces, “Please say a command”. 3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to , speak a command. Operating tips: . . . Voice commands cannot be accepted when the icon is . The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting the ENTER switch on the steering wheel. If the command is not recognized, the system announces, “Please say again”.

Repeat the command in a clear voice. . . Push the BACK button once to return to the previous screen. If you want to cancel the command, push and hold the TALK switch for 1 second. The message “Voice canceled” will be announced. Push the TALK switch again to pause the operation. Push the TALK switch to restart the operation. If you want to adjust the volume of the system feedback, push the volume control buttons (+ or −) on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement.

Phone numbers Speak phone numbers according to the following examples: . 1-800-662-6200 — “Dial one eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero.” Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single digits. Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five five six thousands”. Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak the number “0” as “ zero”. If the letter “o ( Oh)” is included in the house number, it will not be recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you speak “oh” instead of “ zero”. You can only say “zero” for “0 (Zero)”.
SAA1907

.

.

Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate Command Mode)
The voice recognition system has a function to learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition performance. The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons. Having the system learn the user’s voice: 1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel, highlight the “Others” key on the display and then push the ENTER button.

How to speak numbers: NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands. Refer to the following examples. General rule Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.

6. Select a voice command and then push the ENTER button. The voice recognition system starts.

SAA1921

SAA1922

7. The system requests that you repeat a command after a tone. 8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to , speak the command that the system requested. 9. When the system has recognized the voice command, the voice of the user is learned. Push the switch or BACK button to return to the previous screen. If the system has learned the command correctly, the voice command indicator on the screen turns on.

Speaker Adaptation function settings: Edit Name Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen. Store Result When this item is turned to ON, the voice recognition system can easily recognize the user’s voice that it has learned. Reset Result Resets the user’s voice that the voice recognition system has learned.

Continuous Learning When this item is turned to ON, you can have the system learn the voice commands in succession, without selecting commands one by one.

Minimize voice feedback (for Alternate Command Mode)
To minimize the voice feedback from the system, perform the following steps. 1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel. 2. Highlight the “Others” key using the multifunction controller and push the ENTER button. 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and then push the ENTER button. 4. Highlight the “Minimize Voice Feedback” key and push the ENTER button. 5. The item is turned to ON and the vocal feedback is reduced if the voice recognition system is activated.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the system fails to interpret the command correctly. Solution 1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section. 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level. 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on. NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized. 4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place. The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE the phonebook. PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM” earlier in this section; page 4-58.) 2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

WARNING
. Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

.

WARNING
. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. Keep the rear hatch closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the rear hatch open, follow these precautions: 1) Open all the windows. air recirculation to 2) Set the off and the fan control to high to circulate the air.

The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: — The vehicle is raised for service. — You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. — You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. — You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

.

. .

.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

.

If the engine oil temperature is high, the engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Driving while the engine oil temperature is high may result in engine damage.

WARNING
. The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry

.

5-2

Starting and driving

grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

start the engine.

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION
. Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Do not push or tow your vehicle to

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level

.

.

. .

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information
. . The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature, check the tire pressure for all four tires.

ITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

flat tire.) . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/ or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (See “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency” section for changing a

.

.

.

.

CAUTION
. The TPMS may not function properly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow. Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor re-

For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MON-

.

5-4

Starting and driving

ception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly. Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. Some examples are: — Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle. — If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle. — If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/ AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 2. Do not apply the brakes. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. 4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced. 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the
Starting and driving 5-5

road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane. . If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

WARNING
The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. . The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire. . . . Do not rapidly apply the brakes. Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal. Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see “CHANGING A FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency” section of this Owner’s Manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on underinflated tires. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage. See “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible. 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.

5-6

Starting and driving

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury. Before operating the push-button ignition switch, be sure to move the selector lever to the P (Park) position (for automatic transmission model) or the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (for manual transmission model).
SSD0825

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE START FUNCTION
The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the 1 specified operating range * . When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly. If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine.
Starting and driving 5-7

.

The cargo room area is not included in the operating range but the Intelligent Key may function. If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, inside the glove box or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function. If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function.

during the OFF position. The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theft steering lock device. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, push the ignition switch to the OFF position. To unlock the steering wheel, push the ignition switch. If the steering lock release malfunction indicator appears on the vehicle information display, push the pushbutton ignition switch again while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left. (See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.) If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK position. Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display. (See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

.

.

SSD0661

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION
When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal (automatic transmission model) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission model), the ignition switch position will change as follows: . . . . . Push center once to change to ACC. Push center two times to change to ON. Push center three times to change to OFF. (No position illuminates.) Push center four times to return to ACC. Open or close any door to return to LOCK

Automatic transmission models
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to LOCK until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

5-8

Starting and driving

position. When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows: 1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position. 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. The ignition switch position indicator will not illuminate. 3. Open the door. The ignition switch will change to the LOCK position. The selector lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.

running.

ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.

OFF
The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. Automatic transmission models: The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

SSD0826

CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the pushbutton ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this position. The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted in the port.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost B discharged, the guide light * of the Intelligent A Key port * blinks and the indicator appears on the vehicle information display. (See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.) In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the 1 port * allows you to start the engine. Make sure that the key ring side faces backward as illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port until it is latched and secured. To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push
Starting and driving 5-9

ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio, when the engine is not

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
the ignition switch to the OFF position and pull the Intelligent Key out of the port. NOTE: The Intelligent Key port does not charge the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the low battery indicator in the vehicle information display, replace the battery as soon as possible. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.) . . Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel. Check that all windows and lights are clean. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. Lock all doors. Position seat and adjust head restraints. Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. (See “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic Transmission (AT) model: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. (P is recommended.) The starter is designed not to operate unless the selector lever is in either of the above positions. Manual Transmission (MT) model: Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position. Depress the clutch pedal fully to the floor. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. The Intelligent Key must be carried when operating the ignition switch. 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal (AT model) or the clutch pedal (MT model) and push the ignition switch to start the engine. To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position. . If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little

. .

CAUTION
. Never place anything except the Intelligent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Doing so may cause damage to the equipment. Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the correct direction when inserting it to the Intelligent Key port. The engine may not start if it is in the incorrect direction. Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

. . . . .

.

.

5-10 Starting and driving

DRIVING THE VEHICLE
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. . If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to OFF. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the pushbutton ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. 4. Warm-up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start. When racing the engine up to 4,500 rpm or more under no load condition, the engine will enter the fuel cut mode. 5. To stop the engine, shift the selector lever to the P (Park) position (AT model) or move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (MT model), and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 7 speed automatic transmission
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum efficiency and smooth operation. Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle
After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the selector lever button before shifting the selector lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever. This automatic transmission model is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch position is ON. The selector lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
Starting and driving 5-11

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to OFF and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and push the selector lever button to shift into a driving gear. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

CAUTION
. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose. Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

WARNING
. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) D (Drive), or manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while vehicle is moving forward. Never shift to P (Park) or D (Drive) while vehicle is moving rearward. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. .

SSD0827
Selector lever

Shifting
To move the selector lever, : : Push the button while depressing the brake pedal, Push the button,

.

.

: Just move the selector lever. After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R (Reverse). All other positions can be selected without pushing the button.

5-12 Starting and driving

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

CAUTION
Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed and the selector lever button pushed in to move the selector lever from the P (Park) position, the N (Neutral) position or any drive position to the R (Reverse) position. N (Neutral):

CAUTION
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position. P (Park) position: Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed and the selector lever button pushed in to move the selector lever from the N (Neutral) position or any drive position to the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

SSD0828
Paddle shifter

Manual shift mode
When the selector lever is in the manual shift gate, the transmission is ready for the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by moving the selector lever up or down, or pulling the right-side or left-side paddle shifter. When shifting up, move the selector lever to the + (up) side or pull the right-side paddle shifter A (+) * . The transmission shifts to the higher range. When shifting down, move the selector lever to the − (down) side or pull the left-side paddle B shifter (−) * . The transmission shifts to the lower range.
Starting and driving 5-13

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to the N (Neutral) position and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving.

When canceling the manual shift mode, return the selector lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to the normal driving mode. When you pull the paddle shifter while in the D (Drive) position, the transmission will shift to the upper or lower range temporarily. The transmission will automatically return to the D (Drive) position after a short period of time. If you want to return to the D (Drive) position manually, pull and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5 seconds. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the transmission position indicator in the meter. Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1M ? / 2M ? / 3M ? / 4M ? / 5M ? / 6M ? / 7M

1M (1st): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. . Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 7th gear. This reduces fuel economy. Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession. In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control. In the manual shift mode, the transmission automatically shifts down to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop. When accelerating again, it is necessary to shift up to the desired range.

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, note that the transmission will be locked in any of the forward gears according to the condition. If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for 3 seconds. Then push the ignition switch back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.

.

.

7M (7th): Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds. 6M (6th) and 5M (5th): Use this position when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes. 4M (4th), 3M (3rd) and 2M (2nd): Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.

.

Accelerator downshift — In D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into the lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

5-14 Starting and driving

suitable tool as illustrated.
C 5. Push the selector lever button * and move the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position D * while holding down the shift lock.

Push the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location. If the battery is discharged completely, the steering wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked. If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmission system as soon as possible.

SSD0829

SSD0536

Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the selector lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the selector lever button pushed. To move the selector lever, perform the following procedure: 1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Remove the shift lock cover suitable tool. 4. Push down the shift lock
A * B *

MANUAL TRANSMISSION Shifting
To change gears, or when upshifting or downshifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into an appropriate gear, and then slowly and smoothly release the clutch pedal. This vehicle is equipped with a short throw shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth gear changes, be sure to fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage could occur. Start the vehicle in 1st gear and upshift to 2nd,
Starting and driving 5-15

using a using a

3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence according to the vehicle speed. To back up, depress the shift knob and then move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position after stopping the vehicle completely. The shift knob returns to its original position when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral) position. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1st (Low gear), shift to N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R or 1st.

.

Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse). When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied. .

gear. Thus, the engine speed may be kept high depending on the gear position and vehicle speed. When the clutch pedal is depressed with the transmission in neutral, the system operates for approximately 2 seconds, and then the engine speed will decrease to the idle speed. When the engine coolant temperature is low right after starting the engine, engine speed synchronization will be delayed or may be insufficient. The system controls the engine speed up to the rev limit. Note that S-MODE is not a function that prevents over-revving resulting from shifting mistakes. The system does not operate while the vehicle is backing up. If the engine speed is limited lower than usual when the engine oil temperature is extremely high, the system will control up to the limited engine speed. If the malfunction indicator light illuminates, the system may not operate and the SMODE indicator turns off.

. .

.

WARNING
. Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.

SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) (if so equipped for Manual Transmission models)
The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) automatically adjusts the engine speed to match the selecting gear ratio while changing gears. Precautions: . Shift lever and clutch pedal operations are not different than a conventional manual transmission. Fully depress the clutch pedal. Insufficient pedal depression may cause slow response of this system. When the clutch pedal is depressed with the gear still engaged, the engine speed is kept at the proper level for the engaged

.

. .

.

.

.

CAUTION
. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may damage the clutch. .

5-16 Starting and driving

While the S-MODE is off, you can drive the vehicle as a conventional manual transmission model. Note that the status of the S-MODE (on or off) is memorized even after the ignition switch is turned off; however, it will be initialized (off) when the battery is disconnected.
C The transmission position indicator * shows the selected gear: N (Neutral), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, R (Reverse).

SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) operation:
SSD0830

SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) warning: The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) warning will appear on the vehicle information display and the S-MODE indicator will turn off if a system malfunction occurs. If the warning appears, the S-MODE function will not operate, but manual transmission will operate normally and driving can be continued. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SSD0831

The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) automatically adjusts the engine speed by controlling the engine throttle. The accelerator pedal does not have to be depressed. The system detects the clutch pedal and shift lever operations, and then calculates the target engine speed using the shifting gear position and the vehicle speed information. The system provides accurate engine speed control that helps achieve quick gear shifting and reduces shift shock on clutch engagement. . When downshifting: The engine speed is automatically increased to the target engine speed before the clutch is engaged.
Starting and driving 5-17

Activating the system: To activate the S-MODE, push the S-MODE A B switch * . The S-MODE indicator * on the tachometer will show “S”. To deactivate, push and hold the S-MODE switch for more than 1 second. The S-MODE indicator will turn off.

.

When upshifting: The engine speed is automatically kept after the engine speed lowers to the target engine speed. Rapid clutch engagement before the engine speed lowers to the target engine speed may cause shift shock.

There may be a slight difference between the timing of the up-shift indicator illumination and the tachometer indication.

.

When depressing the clutch pedal with the gear engaged: The engine speed is automatically kept at the proper engine speed for the engaged gear. This function will not operate when low (1st) gear is selected. There is a delay between the clutch pedal operation and the S-MODE operation. Make sure the engine speed is adjusted before engaging the clutch again.
SSD0832

Upshift indicator (if so equipped for Manual Transmission models)
The manual transmission up-shift indicator is located in the tachometer and shows the driver the timing to shift into a higher gear by illuminating. The use of the up-shift indicator will help you to upshift at a constant engine speed from any gear. The up-shift indicator will start flashing when the engine speed reaches about 500 rpm before the set figure while driving, and then illuminate after the engine speed reaches the set figure. The engine speed for upshifting can be set on the vehicle information display. See “Setting” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

Suggested maximum speed in each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. .

WARNING
Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL
. If the cruise control system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The CRUISE indicator light on the meter panel will then blink to warn the driver. If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise control system will cancel automatically. If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The CRUISE indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, perform the following procedures. . . on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.) in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

.

CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately. Failure to do so may cause engine damage.

.

SPA2110

To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: . when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed . . in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed on winding or hilly roads

5-20 Starting and driving

switch and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. . To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

models) or depress the clutch pedal (Manual Transmission models), the cruise control will be canceled. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods: . Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET/COAST switch. Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch. Push, then quickly release the RESUME/ ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

.

.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods:
SSD0833

.

a) Push the CANCEL switch. b) Tap the brake pedal. c) Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE light will turn off. . If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/ COAST switch and reset at the cruising speed, the cruise control will disengage. Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn it on again. The cruise control will automatically cancel if the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed. If you move the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position (Automatic Transmission

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods: . Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch and release it. Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
Starting and driving 5-21

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will illuminate. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST

.

.

.

.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
. Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles. Select a gear range suitable to road conditions. Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine idling. Keep your engine tuned up. Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. Keep the tires inflated at the correct pressure. Improper tire pressure will increase wear and waste fuel. Make sure the front wheels are properly aligned. Improper alignment will cause premature tire wear and lower fuel economy. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary. When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance. . Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. Avoid quick starts. Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

. . . . . . .

. . .

.

.

.

5-22 Starting and driving

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) gear. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in the 1st gear.
SD1006MA

WARNING
. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious acci-

dents. . Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be applied and the transmission placed into P (Park) for Automatic Transmission (AT) model or in an appropriate gear for Manual Transmission (MT) model. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the automatic transmission selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. .
1 HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: *

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. . HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:
2 *

. .

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. . HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO 3 CURB: *
Starting and driving 5-23

.

POWER STEERING
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

BRAKE SYSTEM BRAKING PRECAUTIONS
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.

WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate. The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer. When the brake pedal is depressed slowly and firmly, you may hear a clicking noise and feel a slight pulsation. This is normal and indicates that the Brake Assist System is operating.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

5-24 Starting and driving

BRAKE ASSIST
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance. This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer. assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.

Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will cause overheating of the brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster and reduce gas mileage. To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING
. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping
Starting and driving 5-25

WARNING
. While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power

.

distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety. . Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. — When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. — When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. See “TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. — For detailed information, see “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h). When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the

5-26 Starting and driving

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving situations, the system will control braking and engine output to help keep the vehicle on its steered path. . . When the VDC system is operating, the indicator in the instrument panel blinks. If the indicator blinks, the road conditions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions. Be sure to drive carefully. (See “Slip indicator light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section, and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.) Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the system, the and indicator lights illuminate in the instrument panel. As long as these indicators are illuminated, the VDC system function is canceled. The VDC system uses an Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) function to improve vehicle traction. The ABLS system works when one of the driving wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel, which distributes the driving power to the other drive wheel. If the vehicle is operated with the VDC OFF switch pushed and the VDC system turned off, all VDC systems will be turned off. The ABLS system and ABS will still operate with the VDC system off. If the ABLS system is activated, the indicator will blink and you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. While the VDC system is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or feel a vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly. The VDC system computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed forward or backward. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. . If engine related parts such as muffler are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the indicator or indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate. Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars and bushings are not NISSAN approved or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling indicator performance, and the indicator or both indicator or lights may illuminate. If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not standard equipment or are extreindicator mely deteriorated, the indicator or both indicator or lights may illuminate. When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not
Starting and driving 5-27

.

.

WARNING
. The VDC system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or due to careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful

.

.

PERFORMANCE DAMPERS (NISMO models)
operate properly and the inindicator or both dicator or indicator lights may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads. . When driving on unstable surfaces such as a turntable, ferry, elevator indicator or or ramp, the indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface. If wheels or tires other than those recommended are used, the VDC system may not operate properly indicator or indicator and or both indicator lights may illuminate. The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the Intelligent Key system.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. Tire chains may be used. For details, see “TIRE CHAINS” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

The performance dampers are installed in the front and rear parts of the NISMO models for improved handling and ride.

WARNING
. High-pressure nitrogen gas is sealed inside the performance dampers. Do not attempt to modify or disassemble them. For disposal of the performance dampers or when scrapping the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Never burn or puncture the performance dampers. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause serious personal injury.

ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the outside temperature will drop below 328F (08C), check antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see “ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see “BATTERY” in the “8. Maintenance and doit-yourself” section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see “ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: . A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.
Starting and driving 5-29

. . .

A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting. The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 208F (−78C) or lower.

. .

To use the engine block heater
1. Turn the engine off. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord. 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet. 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

WARNING
. Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

.

.

.

5-30 Starting and driving

WARNING
. Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection. Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury. Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, see “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section. could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/ or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below.

Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position (Automatic transmission models). Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) gear (Manual transmission models). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
In case of emergency

.

.

WARNING
. Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual

6-2

transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park). . Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

.

MCE0001A

SCE0789

Blocking wheels

1 Place suitable blocks * at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

In case of emergency 6-3

Jacking up the vehicle and removing the damaged tire

the vehicle while it is on the jack. Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.

WARNING
. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials. Do not allow passengers to stay in
In case of emergency

.

SCE0790
Jack-up point

.

. . .

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown. The jack should be used on level firm ground.

.

6-4

SCE0504

SCE0661

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

Installing the spare tire
The T-type spare tire is designed for emergency use. (See specific instructions under the heading “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.) 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. Models equipped with different sized tires in the front and rear: When replacing a front tire, make sure that the hole in the spare tire wheel is aligned
In case of emergency 6-5

with the pin on the brake rotor. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence 1 2 3 4 5 as illustrated (* , * , * , * , * ) until they are tight. 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the vehicle completely.

.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-lb (108 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval. . Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

WARNING
. Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. The T-type spare tire and small size spare tire are designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

.

WARNING
. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

COLD pressure: After the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar. 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle. 6. Place the spare tire cover and the cargo room floor carpeting over the damaged tire. 7. Close the rear hatch.

.

.

6-6

In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed. protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. . Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

WARNING
. If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. Keep the battery out of the reach of children. The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye

.

.

.

. .

.

In case of emergency 6-7

using jumper cables before pushing the ignition switch and disengaging the steering lock.

CAUTION
. Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (−) to body ground (as illustrated) — not to the battery. Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.
A *

.

SCE0791

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle A A B * , position the two vehicles (* and * ) to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position (Automatic transmis-

sion models). Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (Manual transmission models). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly C wrung out moist cloth * to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as 1 2 3 4 illustrated (* ? * ? * ? * ). If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and cannot be turned. Supply power

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster A vehicle * at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started B *.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before trying again.

6-8

In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING
Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing. 7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive 4 3 2 1 cable (* ? * ? * ? * ). 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid. 9. Put the battery cover on.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION CAUTION
. Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or towstarted. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage. Three way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three way catalyst may be damaged. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle. . . Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

.

.

.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the selector lever to the P (Park) position (Automatic transmission models). Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (Manual transmission models). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner
In case of emergency 6-9

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. 3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to normal. 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen. 5. Open the engine hood. with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time. 7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest NISSAN dealer. When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions.

WARNING
. . Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

CAUTION
. When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. Always attach safety chains before towing.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact

.

6-10 In case of emergency

For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see “FLAT TOWING” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

SCE0792

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN (except for NISMO models)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the rear wheels. . When towing rear wheel drive models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by selecting the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanIn case of emergency 6-11

CAUTION
. Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If

ism. . If you have to tow manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies) or four wheels on the ground: — Push the ignition switch to the ON position and turn off all accessories. — Always release the parking brake. — Move the transmission shift lever to the N (Neutral) position. — Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances for manual transmission models only: . Rear wheels on the ground: Speed: Below 50 MPH (80 km/h) Distance: Less than 50 miles (80 km) . Four wheels on the ground: Speed: Below 70 MPH (112 km/h) Distance: Less than 500 miles (800 km) — If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove

the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission.

6-12 In case of emergency

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

WARNING
. . Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

Pulling a stuck vehicle
SCE0836

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN (NISMO models)

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.

CAUTION
Do not tow NISMO models with any wheel on the ground, or with the front or rear wheels raised, because this may cause damage to the front bumper with an aerodynamic splitter, rear bumper with an aerodynamic diffuser or exhaust pipes. NISSAN recommends that you place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
In case of emergency 6-13

For NISMO models: When the front license plate and bracket are installed, temporarily remove them. (See “INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for the installation procedures.) A screwdriver is supplied with the jacking tools for removal.
3 2. Securely install the vehicle recovery hook * (stored with jacking tools) as illustrated. Attach the tow strap to the recovery hook. 4 Do not use the tie down hooks * for towing or vehicle recovery.

. .

Never tow a vehicle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks. Always pull the cable straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.

.

.

Make sure that the hook is properly secured in the original place after use. Replace the recovery hook cover (except for NISMO models) or the front license plate (for NISMO models).

Rocking a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure: 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. 2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions. 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires. 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. . Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and D (drive) (automatic transmission

CAUTION
SCE0793

.

1. Access the mounting hole for the recovery hook. Except for NISMO models: To remove the A 1 cover * , first unhook the claws * using a suitable tool wrapped in a cloth, and then 2 pull the lower side of the cover * . .

Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the vehicle recovery hooks or main structural members of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. To protect the paint surface, wash your vehicle as soon as you can: . . . after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain after driving on coastal roads when contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface when dust or mud builds up on the surface . .

CAUTION
Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used. Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.

.

.

WASHING
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water.

7-2

Appearance and care

proper product. . Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS
SAI0046

NISMO models

CAUTION
Do not use an automatic car wash for NISMO models. The rear spoiler may be damaged.

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory stores.

WHEELS
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. . Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.
Appearance and care 7-3

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before reapplying wax. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

TIRE DRESSING
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint. If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions: . Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily with an oil-based tire dressing. Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/ grooves (where it would be difficult to remove). Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/ grooves. Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.

Aluminum alloy wheels
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not removed.

CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels: . Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels. . Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature. Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CAUTION
. . Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar material. Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to the leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s natural finish. Only use fabric protectors approved by NISSAN.

.

.

.

.

.

7-4

Appearance and care

.

Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them. See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.

FLOOR MATS
The use of NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

WARNING
SAI0044

Floor mat positioning aid
This model includes front floor mat brackets to act as floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The front floor mats have grommet holes in them. To install, simply position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floor pan contour. Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

Appearance and care 7-5

CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.

this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer.

.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION
. . . . Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing where atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt is used.

CAUTION
. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as

Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. .

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with long service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s fine mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, see “MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS” later in this section.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership information systems. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins. You can be confident that an NISSAN dealer’s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following items with “*” is found later in this section.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.

Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood, operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.

8-2

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation*: Tires cannot be rotated because your vehicle is equipped with different sized tires in the front and rear. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet. Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjusted, see a NISSAN dealer. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjuster and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill, check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. (See “PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING” in the “5. Starting and driving” section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.

Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe condition require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoirs. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see “CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care” section. Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. . It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel tank and the battery. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery . cable before working near the fan. . The fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

WARNING
. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For manual transmission models, move the shift lever to N (Neutral). For automatic transmission models, move the selector lever to P (Park). Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs. Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position. If you must work with the engine . .

CAUTION
Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, coolant, and/ or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

.

.

.

.

.

.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also available. (See “OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.) You should be aware that incomplete or
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

.

.

improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, we recommend that it be done by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary. lized or distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage the engine cooling system.
Outside temperature down to 8C −35 8F −30 50% Demineralized water or distilled water 50%

WARNING
. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency” section of this manual. The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

Antifreeze

SDI2043

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below 2 MIN * , open the reservoir tank cap and add 1 coolant up to the MAX * level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add 1 it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level * . Tighten the cap securely after adding engine coolant. If the cooling system requires coolant frequently, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

.

CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% deminera-

8-8

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ENGINE OIL CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
Major cooling system repairs should be performed by a NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating. and pour recommended oil through the 3 opening. Do not overfill * . 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the breakin period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

WARNING
. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets.
SDI2348

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way. 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil 1 level. It should be within the range * . If the 2 oil level is below * , remove the oil filler cap

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands. . Place the safety jack stands under the
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

.

.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

vehicle jack-up points. . A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.

4. (Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the engine oil filter change is needed.)
2 Loosen the oil filter * with an oil filter wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover. a. Remove the small plastic clip at the center point of the undercover. b. Then remove the other bolts that hold the undercover in place.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.

CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to engine damage. 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.5 N·m) 8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 N·m)

CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage.
SDI2335

Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. 2. Remove the oil filler cap.
1 3. Remove the drain plug * with a wrench and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. . . Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
Do not use excessive force. 9. Refill engine with recommended oil and install the oil filler cap securely. See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for drain and refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine. 10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter. Correct as required. 11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. d. place. Install the other bolts that hold the undercover in place. Be careful not to strip the bolts or over-tighten them. When checking or replacement is required, we recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION
. . Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do not mix with other fluids. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground. 3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

WARNING
. Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

.

.

After the operation
1. Install the engine undercover into position as the following steps. a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip out. b. Hold the engine undercover into position.

c. Insert the clip through the undercover into the hole in the frame, then push the center of the clip in to lock the clip in
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

POWER STEERING FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

CAUTION
. . Do not overfill. Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake and clutch fluid information, see “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
. Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch system. Be sure to clean the filler cap before removing.

.
SDI1765A

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The fluid level should be checked using the HOT 1 2 range (* : HOT MAX., * : HOT MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 122 to 1768F (50 to 808C) or 3 4 using the COLD range (* : COLD MAX., * : COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 32 to 868F (0 to 308C). If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash the surface with water.

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

SDI2025A

SDI1906A

SDI2349

BRAKE FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is 1 below the MIN line * or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 2 fluid up to the MAX line * . If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid 1 level is below the MIN line * , add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or 2 equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line * . If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
Antifreeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid warning light comes on. To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening. Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

BATTERY
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio. Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of window washer fluid. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent. and water. . Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (−) battery terminal cable to prevent discharging it.

. .

CAUTION
. Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint. Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate

CAUTION
When the battery cable is removed from the battery terminal, do not close either of front doors. The automatic window adjusting function will not work, and the side roof panel may be damaged. To disconnect the negative (−) battery terminal, perform the procedure in the following order. Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel may contact and be damaged. 1. Close the windows. 2. Open the hood. 3. Close and lock all the doors. 4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery terminal. 5. Securely close the hood. To connect the negative (−) battery terminal,

.

.

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

perform the procedure in the following order. Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel may contact and be damaged. 1. Unlock and open the driver side door. Do not close the door. 2. Open the hood. 3. Connect the negative (−) battery terminal. Then close the hood. 4. Fully open the driver side door window. 5. Close the driver side door and the window. . . .

battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
DI0137MF

WARNING
. Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low

Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove the battery cover if it is necessary). It should be 1 between the UPPER LEVEL * and LOWER 2 LEVEL * lines. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. 1. Remove the cell plugs
3 *.

.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

DRIVE BELTS JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “JUMP STARTING” in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer.

SDI1480E

SDI2119
VQ37VHR engine

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL 1 * line. If the side of the battery is not clear, check the distilled water level by looking directly A above the cell; the condition * indicates B OK and the conditions * needs more to be added. 3. Tighten cell plugs
3 *.

WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belts. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SPARK PLUGS
replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

WARNING
Be sure the engine and the ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.
SDI2020

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule in “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”, but do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

AIR CLEANER
cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades. Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

WARNING
. Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for maintenance intervals. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI2359

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. 1. Pull the wiper arm.
A 2. Push the release tab * , and then move the 1 wiper blade down the wiper arm * while pushing the release tab to remove.

CAUTION
. After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. . Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.
SDI2362

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until a click sounds. 4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not A to let wax get into the washer nozzle * . This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, B remove it with a needle or small pin * . Be careful not to damage the nozzle.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

BRAKES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see the maintenance log section of your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for maintenance intervals.

FUSES

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.
SDI1479A

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of the brake pad the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear warning sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position and the headlight switch is turned to OFF.

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

2. Open the engine hood and remove the cover on the battery and the fuse/fusible link holder. 3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

SDI1754
A 5. If the fuse is open * , replace it with a new B fuse * . Spare fuses are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

SDI2361

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

2. Open the fuse box lid. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
A *.

CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position and the headlight switch is turned to OFF.

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

SDI2135

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery and removed parts.

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Replace the battery as follows: 1. Remove the mechanical key from the key. 2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing. 3. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent . Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction. Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity. Make sure that the + side faces the bottom case.

and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
SDI1889

— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. — Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. — Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. — Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

.

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts 1 * , and then push them together until it is 2 securely closed * . 5. Operate the buttons to check its operation. See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replacement. FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses

HEADLIGHTS
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Replacing
Xenon headlight bulb: If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement. NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

SDI2352
Map light

SDI1679
Vanity mirror light

SDI1839

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section, “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
. .

Most tires naturally lose air over time. Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.

.

WARNING
. .

.

Tire inflation pressure Check the pressure of the tires (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire

Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. The Gross Vehicle Weight rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V. S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Informa-

.

tion label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level. Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (137 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed rated tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory. this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR. size — see “TIRE LABELING”

much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap. 7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge. 4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare it to the specifica8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

1 * Tire

size (example: P215/60R16 94H) 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires have this information.)
2. Three-digit number (215): This number

gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (60): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

5. Two-digit number (16): This number is

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture 6. Four numbers represent the week and

the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire.
3 * Tire ply composition and material

drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.
SDI1607
Example

2 * TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
4 * Maximum

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department of Transportation”. The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.
cation mark
3. Two-digit code: Tire size

permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi-

5 * Maximum load rating

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-

tional)
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

load rating as the factory installed tire.
6 * Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING
. When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (Example: Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire has radial structure.
8 * Manufacturer or brand name .

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other tire-related terminology: In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

.

All season tires
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some

If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of nonstudded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be installed on 19-inch size tires. Doing so will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire chains/cables, you should install 18-inch size tires on your vehicle. Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the SAE standard minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels. Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with tire chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation Tires cannot be rotated because your vehicle is equipped with different sized tires in the front and rear.
A pin is on the front brake rotor to prevent the rear wheels from being installed in place of the front wheels. The spare tire can be installed in place of the front and rear wheels. When installing the spare tire in the front wheel, the hole in the spare tire wheel must be aligned with the pin on the brake rotor.

WARNING
.

.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

.

.
SDI1663

1. Wear indicator 2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

.

WARNING
.

.

Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced. The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When

wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced. Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician, because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury. Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WARNING
. The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/ shoe wear. See “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

.

Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. (See “SPECIFICATIONS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.)

.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/ or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. The use of retread tire is not recommended. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet. .

the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage. Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure of the full size spare tire (if so equipped) at the recommended pressure for standard tires, as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. For Tire and Loading Information label location, see “Tire and Loading Information label” in the index of this manual. With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the front wheels and original tire used on the rear wheels (drive

.

.

.

Care of wheels
See “CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care” section for details about care of the wheels.

. .

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY (Ttype) spare tire)
Observe the following precautions if the T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.

.

WARNING
. The T-type spare tire should be used for emergency use. It should be replaced with the standard tire at

.

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

wheels). Use tire chains only on the two rear original tires. . Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles. Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.

. .

CAUTION
. Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle. Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation. For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation. NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil, which is available at a NISSAN dealer. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Available in mainland US through a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil. For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 328F (08C). For additional information, see “VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION” later in this section for air conditioner specification label. DEXRONTMVI type ATF or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid may also be used.

9-2

Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION VQ37VHR engine
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91) may be temporarily used, but only under the following precautions: . Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with unleaded premium gasoline as soon as possible. Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. .

this will damage the three-way catalyst. Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN vehicle limited warranty.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. . The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol) . It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN
Technical and consumer information 9-3

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications.

.

.

However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

.

CAUTION
. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence.

.

vehicles. If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling or hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer or other competent service facility. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

E-85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (Example: fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

9-4

Technical and consumer information

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in change intervals.
STI0505

Change intervals
1. 2. API certification mark API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance, see “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/ LUBRICANTS” earlier in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy. Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new NISSAN vehicle limited warranties. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more
Technical and consumer information 9-5

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant. Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioning system.

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, NISSAN UV Luminous Oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
If you plan to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0612

STI0613

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number)
The number is stamped as shown in the engine compartment.

1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground. Locate A the two dents * on the front bumper. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit. (Be sure that the drill only goes through the bumper fascia.) 2. Insert grommets into the hole on the bumper fascia. 3. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the grommet hole to add 908 turn onto the part B *. 4. Make sure the side end surface of the license plate bracket is aligned with the C bumper * .
STI0618

9-12 Technical and consumer information

STI0629
D Mark the center of the hole * on both sides with a felt-tip pen. Remove the bracket from the bumper, and then open 0.9 to 1.0 inch (22 to 25 mm) diameter holes on the D bumper using the marks * as a center.

5. Insert J-nuts into the license plate bracket before placing the license plate bracket on the fascia. 6. Install the license plate bracket with screws. 7. Install the license plate with bolts that are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

Technical and consumer information 9-13

FOR NISMO MODELS
Use the following steps to mount the license plate: Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag. . . . . License plate bracket J-nut 6 2 Screw 6 4 Screw grommet 6 4

1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground. 2. Temporarily place the license plate bracket A while aligning points * of the front bumper B fascia with holes * in the license plate bracket.
A B 3. Confirm that points * and * are aligned. Hold the license plate bracket and mark the C points * on the bumper facia through the D center of the holes * with a felt-tip pen.

4. Remove the license plate bracket.
A 5. Carefully drill two shallow pilot holes * C and * using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be sure that the drill only goes through the fascia.)

STI0650

6. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia. 7. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the

9-14 Technical and consumer information

REMOVING AIR DEFLECTORS (except for NISMO models)
grommet hole to add a 908 turn onto the part E *. 8. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket before placing the license plate bracket on the fascia. 9. Install the license plate bracket with the screws. 10. Install the license plate with bolts that are not longer than 0.55 in (14 mm). When the recovery hook is used, you need to temporarily remove the front license plate and bracket from the vehicle. (See “VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)” in the “6. In case of emergency” section for further details.) 4. Store the two air deflectors and four screws to reinstall in the reverse order. 5. When reinstalling, make sure all six screws are firmly tightened on both air deflectors.

STI0623
Left side

This vehicle is equipped with air deflectors in front of the front wheels. The deflectors will change the air flow to help improve aerodynamic performance. When transporting your vehicle on a trailer, the air deflectors may interfere with a steep slope to a trailer bed. In this case, remove the deflectors from the undercover of the vehicle. 1. Loosen three screws as shown and remove A the left-side air deflector * . 2. Tighten the removed screw original position.
B *

in its

3. Perform the same procedure to remove the right-side air deflector.
Technical and consumer information 9-15

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
cargo.
.

WARNING
.

.

.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside the vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V. S.S. label. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer. Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located

on the Tire and Loading Information label.
.

Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the weight of total occupants weight subtracted from the load limit.

.

.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:
. .

luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
STI0365

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label. To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the illustration.

Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the

load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. (See “MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS” later in this section.) Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label.
Technical and consumer information 9-17

driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load

TOWING A TRAILER LOADING TIPS . The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
.

Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

to hazardous vehicle handling and long braking distance. This may cause a premature tire malfunction, which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

WARNING
.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

.

.

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Overloading could not only shorten the life of your vehicle and the tires, but also could lead

9-18 Technical and consumer information

FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home. be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
. . Always tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. Your vehicle speed should never exceed 70 MPH (112 km/h) when flat towing your vehicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles of towing may cause damage to the transmission’s internal parts.

CAUTION
. Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward. DO NOT tow any automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication. For emergency towing procedures refer to “TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN (except for NISMO models)” in the “6. In case of emergency” section of this manual.

TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

.

.

.

.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Technical and consumer information 9-19

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: . Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada: Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: . Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive

9-20 Technical and consumer information

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)
Due to legal requirements in some states/ areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/ Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/ maintenance test readiness condition. Push the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” condition, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the “ready condition”. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. 1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle until the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points between the C and H (normal operating temperature). 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds. 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 9 minutes. 4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running. 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatic transmission selector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position or the manual transmission shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. 9. Turn the engine off. 10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more time. If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed. This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: . . How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling. Sounds are not recorded. data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

.

. .

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal

9-22 Technical and consumer information

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at a NISSAN dealer. Also available are genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models. In the USA: For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later, contact: 1-800-450-9491 www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact: 1-800-247-5321 For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact: 1-800-247-5321 In Canada: To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact a NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Satisfaction Center at 1-800-3870122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models. unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease. NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.

Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifications — if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts. NISSAN does not warrant nonNISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part. Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit

It’s your right!
If you should need further information visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION: VQ37VHR engine
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91) may be temporarily used, but only under the following precautions: . Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with unleaded premium gasoline as soon as possible. Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. . will damage the three way catalyst. Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN vehicle limited warranty.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle.

For additional information, see “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.

However, for maximum vehicle performance, the use of unleaded premium gasoline is recommended.

See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.

CAUTION
. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control systems, and may also affect warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional information, see “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.